IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 %^ 
 
 SP MS> 
 
 
 .,* 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 C/x 
 
 fA 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 WIIM 12,5 
 
 'U H 
 
 K 12.2 
 
 36 
 
 1.4 
 
 [2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 % '" >^. 
 
 /% ''■ 
 
 vl 
 
 
 
 C? 
 
 / 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 ■^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 s,,# 
 
 .V 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 4^ 
 
 ^<b 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 o 
 
 <> 
 
 -^-^ 
 
 33 WES1 MAIN STREET 
 
 WiE'TER.N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 ''%'■ 
 

 ..V 
 
 i^o^ ^<'- 
 
 C/j 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 m 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 1980 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliograp'iiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or w' ch may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 □ 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommagde 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture reftaurde et/ou pellicul6e 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes gdographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planches f,i/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relid avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight bi iding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along ir.terior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intdrieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 film^es. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl6mentaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ lo meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la methods normals de filmige 
 sont indiqu6s ci-dessous. 
 
 □ Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 r~7| Pages damaged/ 
 I Y I Pages endommagdes 
 
 □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurdes et/ou pellicul^es 
 
 ^ 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d^colordes, tachet^es ou piqudes 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tachdes 
 
 □ Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 D 
 
 Quality in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel suppiementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t6 filmdes d nouveau de fapon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 El 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 [ 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 T 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproducad thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grSce d la 
 g^n^rositd de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are fiimad beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol •—*' (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Les Images suivantes ont 6X6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprim^e sont film6s en commengant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film6s en commenpant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de chaque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE". le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 bep'.ming in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmds d d<)s taux de reduction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul cliche, il est filmd d partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 ::,:S': : 
 
 : ■;«•:: 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
D 
 
 COLLK( 
 
 Al 
 
 Wai 
 
Ihgskal (l[ttltttrc. 
 
 FIRST BOOK OF EXERCISES 
 
 —IN— 
 
 Drill, Calisthenics, 
 
 -AND— 
 
 GYMNASTICS, 
 
 —BY- 
 
 ^- S- EEo-cro-HiTonsr. 
 
 FOR THE USE OF 
 
 CoLLKGKs. Collegiate Institutes, High Schools, Public, Separate 
 
 Private Schools 
 
 — AND— 
 
 GYMNASTIC ASSOCIATIONS. 
 
 AND 
 
 AUTHORIZED BY THE MINISTER OF EDUCATION FOR 
 
 ONTARIO. 
 
 TORONTO : 
 Warwick & Sons, 8 and 10 Wellington Street East. 
 
 1886. 
 

Entered according to the Act of Parliament of Canada, in the year one 
 thousand e,ght hundred and eighty-six, by WARwicK & sSs' 
 m the office of the Minister of Agriculture. 
 
 WARwtcK &, Sons, Printers, 
 
 2« AND 28 FROMT STRUT WMT, TORONTO. 
 
/ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 c< 
 (( 
 (( 
 (( 
 
 « 
 
 t*reface, -•--.. 
 
 The Gymnasium, - - . . . 
 General Instructions, - . . . 
 
 Part I. —For Boys. 
 
 Drill, - 
 
 Squad Drill, with Intervals, 
 In Single Rank, 
 In Two Ranks, 
 " Extended Order, ' - 
 " Dismissing, - 
 Calisthenics — 
 
 Modes of Formation, 
 First Sp' ies of Exercises, - 
 Second " « u . . 
 
 Third " " " 
 Gymnastics — 
 
 Light Dumb-bell Series of Exorcises, 
 Stationary Rope Series of Exercises, 
 
 Part II.— For Girls. 
 
 Drill, --.... 
 
 Calisthenics — 
 
 First Series of Exercises, 
 Second " '*<».. 
 Third " « « - 
 
 Gymnastics — 
 
 Light Dumb-bell Series of Exercises, 
 Indian Club Series of Exercises, 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 9 
 
 13 
 
 17 
 37 
 49 
 60 
 65 
 
 66 
 70 
 
 81 
 
 86 
 
 125 
 157 
 
 191 
 
 192 
 193 
 193 
 
 212 
 220 
 
 / 
 
mg 
 phy 
 
 be \ 
 littl 
 the 
 T 
 by J 
 Pari 
 Lon( 
 
 (( ' 
 
 atter 
 good 
 and 
 to cu 
 they 
 
 to Wi 
 
 looke 
 breat 
 delics 
 are. 
 they 5 
 comp] 
 I effusic 
 of sue 
 the in 
 
 8Uffici( 
 
 ters v< 
 
 but w] 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 As this is siaiply and purely a practical text book embrac- 
 ing nearly all the elementary exercises required to make 
 physical education efficient, interesting and popular, there will 
 be very little said here about theory. There will also be very 
 little said about Hygiene, as that subject is already taught in 
 the schools. 
 
 The following are a few extracts from a work on Education 
 
 by J. G. Spurzheim, M. D. of the Universities of Vienna and 
 
 Paris, and Licentiate of the Royal College of Physicians, 
 
 London : — 
 
 " The physical education of both sexes deserves the greatest 
 attention, and it is unpardonable to neglect that of girls. A 
 good and healthy organization is the basis of all employment 
 and of all enjoyment. Many parents, however, are anxious 
 to cultivate the mind at the expense of the body. They think 
 they cannot instruct their offspring early enough to read and 
 to write, whilst their bodily constitution and health are over- 
 looked. Children are shut up, forced to sit quiet and to 
 breathe a confined air. This error is the greater, the more 
 delicate the children, and the more premature their powers 
 are. The bodily powers of such children are sooner exhausted, 
 they suffer from dyspepsia, headache, and a host of nervous 
 complaints ; their brain is liable to inflammation and serious 
 effusions ; and a premature death is frequently the consequence 
 of such a violation of nature. It is indeed to be lamented that 
 the influence of the physical on the moral part of man is not 
 sufficiently understood. There are parents who will pay mas- 
 ters very dearly in hope of giving excellency to their children, 
 I but who will hesitate to spend the tenth part to procure them 
 
PllEFACE, 
 
 bodily health. Some, by an absurd infatuation, take their 
 own constitutions as a measure of those of their children, and 
 because they themselves in advanced life can support confine- 
 ment and intense application with little injury to health, they 
 conclude that their young and delicate children can do the 
 same. Such notions are altogether erroneous — bodily deform- 
 ities, curved spines and unfitness for various occupations, and 
 the fulfilment of future duties, frequently result from such 
 misunderstood management of children. The advantages of a 
 sound body are incalculable for the individuals themselves, their 
 friends, and their posterity. Body and mind ought to be cul- 
 tivated ill harmony and neither of them at the expense of the 
 other. Health should bo the basis, and instruction the orna- 
 ment of early education. The development of the body will 
 assist the manifestations of the mind, and a good mental 
 education will contribute to bodily health." 
 
 "Bodily exercise is another important point in education. 
 Muscular activity is greater in childhood than in any later age. 
 It is necessary to the development of the body and to health. 
 The body, the intellectual and moral faculties, may be exercised 
 at the same time. The muscles of the arms, or legs or trunk 
 may be exercised according to the utility of such exercise in 
 any future situation, or according to their local weakness. All 
 gymnastic amusements serve to these purposes. It is to be 
 understood that bodily exercise ought to be projiortionate to the 
 innate strength and progressive growth of the individuals, and 
 not beyond the innate capacity, since in that case the misappli- 
 cation of a principle will do harm. It is said that Milo carried 
 on his shoulders a calf day by day till it was full grown. As 
 bodily exercise particularly strengthens, as it invites to sleep, 
 and secures against great disorders, it is to be generally en- 
 couraged. Gymnastic amusement may be established for all 
 ages and for all classes of society. The gymnastic exercises of 
 the Greeks are generally known and admired." 
 
 Montaigne, in his " Essays," published in 1580, eloquently 
 urges the claim of physical education, and Locke in his "Essay 
 on Education " does the same. The advice of those philoso- 
 phers was put in practice by Bassedow in 1774, who founded 
 an educational establishment at Dessau which he called Phil- 
 antropinum, and introduced physical exercises as a regular 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 branch of instruction. The example thus given was followed 
 at other schools, notably at that established by Salzmann, at 
 Schnepfenthal, near Gotlia. Pestalozzi, the great school re- 
 former, paid due attention to physical education, and F. L. 
 Jahn made it popular in Germany. The names of the emin«int 
 authorities who have spoken and written on the subject wouM 
 almost fill a volume. 
 
 It may, perhaps, be unnecessary to remark that Hygiene 
 and Physical Culture are concurrent subjects, and that one is 
 incomplete without the other. In fact the pupils taking an 
 active interest in physical culture will become alive to the 
 importance of developing all the faculties of the body and 
 mind to the highest standard. When they find that the sub- 
 ject of physical culture covers a vast field, including much more 
 than is generally understood by the term ; that it means more 
 than making the muscles hard and strong; more than depth of 
 lung ; more than capacity for endurance ; that it is the adapt- 
 ing of the human body for all its possibilities, they will natur- 
 ally and of their own accord turn their attention to Hygiene, 
 which will then become to them a living fact of vital impor- 
 tance. 
 
 The idea so prevalent that because certain simple calisthenic 
 or gymnastic movements are conducive to health and strength, 
 they are sufficient, is erroneous. This theory ignores the in- 
 tellect. Such exercises require to be repeated daily to be of 
 use, and the intellect having nothing to ievd upon, they become 
 monotonous and wearisome ; hence inattention, listlessness and 
 indifference. 
 
 As all exercises should be recreative, that is, the mind should 
 take pleasure in directing the movements ot the body, it natur- 
 ally follows that those exercises which present the possibility 
 of developing great skill, will prove of most interest to all. 
 When this is thoroughly understood, the participant will 
 eagerly turn to the elementary exercises that l9.y the founda- 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 tion for the higher branches of s;ymnastics, such as the hori- 
 zontal bar, fencing, Indian club swinging, etc. 
 
 The effect that gymnastic and calisthenic exercises have 
 upon any but the muscular system is too often, unfortunately, 
 not considered ; the important effect they have of increasing 
 the action of the respiro.tory, circulatory and nutritive systems, 
 is seldom thought of. We sec this exemplified by thore who 
 engage exclusively in such exercises, for instance, as in the 
 unintellectu^l exercise of lifting heavy dumb-bells. 
 
 So long as those engaged in intellectual pursuits consider 
 that gymnastic and calisthenic exercises, consist of a few crude 
 and monotonous movements invented for the production of 
 strength, they wil! not care to give them the attention they 
 deserve. When, however, it cowics to bo generally known 
 that though gymnastic and calisthenic exercises will (desirably) 
 for the time being, divert their attention from their usual pur- 
 suits, their intellectual faculties wi''! not lie dormant, but only 
 be directed to another channel ; they will then be induced 
 throrgh the acquisition of skill and grace to find the health 
 and strength of body which it is the altimate aim of physical 
 culture to produce. 
 
 The training of pupils in the regular and beautiful exercises 
 comprehended under a good system of gymnastics and calis- 
 thenica, is really the only way in which physical education can 
 be efficiently conducted. 
 
 Another feature which does a great deal towards making 
 the subject popular is the annual school entertainment. School 
 life is replete with incidents which associate themselves with 
 the most pleasant memories of youth, and the annual school 
 entertainment, in which the mental and physical culture of 
 the year should take an equal part, always produces a pleasing 
 sensation in scholastic circles and causes hearts to beat with 
 expectation : it leaves many pleasant memories, never to be 
 
PREFACE. 5 
 
 erased in after years : it, too, awakens an interest in the minds 
 and hearts of parents unknown in any other instance. 
 
 It may be here noticed that the true antidote for aerial and 
 other objectionable gymnastic performances, is the gCD-^ral 
 diffusion of knowledge of, and skill in gymnastics. The public 
 will then appreciate a skilful performance carried out on a 
 proper badis, and performances of the sensational order will 
 cease for want of support. 
 
 It is respectfully submitted that all interested in the impor- 
 tant subject of health, will, after studying the general plan of 
 this work, come to the conclusion that our young people in 
 following up the course of exercises given therein will have 
 their intellectual as well as bodily powers called into play, 
 that their interest will be maintained by the acquisition of 
 skill and grace of movement, as well as of health. 
 
 The Author. 
 
(1) 
 
 cap 
 
 the 
 
 1 
 
 hig] 
 
 six 
 
 as < 
 
 win 
 
 wal 
 
 shoi 
 
 win 
 
 etc.j 
 
 havi 
 
 twei 
 
 for 
 
 socii 
 
 ratu 
 
 port 
 
 bein 
 
 the ] 
 
 feet 
 
 and 
 
 gymi 
 
 build 
 
 at th 
 
THE GYMNASIUM. 
 
 (1) Training Schools, C of leges, Colltgiaie Institutes and High 
 
 Schools. 
 
 The three sizes best adapted for gymnasia according to the 
 capacity required are : Ist 80 x 40, 2nd 70 x 35, 3rd 60 x 30, 
 the last size given being the smallest that can be recommended. 
 
 The windows in the sides of the building should be placed as 
 high as possible ; they should be about three feet high and about 
 six feet wide ; there should be as many of them on both sides 
 as can be put in ; there should be a large window or several 
 windows in one end of the building, the other end being a dead 
 wall. The windows should all work on pivots. The doors 
 should be placed at the end of the building containing the 
 window or windows. A large door for bringing in sawdust, 
 etc., may be placed at one side. The end of the building 
 having the dead wall should have a plank floor for about 
 twenty feet from the wall, so that it can be used, if necessary, 
 for the purpose of school entertainments, gymnasium choral 
 society, hand ball, etc., and it should be entirely free from appa- 
 ratus. The trapeze and flying rings should be in the central 
 portion of the building, the point from which they are suspended 
 being sixteen feet from the ground ; the point of suspension for 
 the row of side rings can be any height from thirteen to sixteen 
 feet from the ground. The building must be properly heated 
 and ventilated ; if heated with a stove, it and the stationary 
 gymnastic apparatus should be properly placed at the end of the 
 building containing the doors and windows. The flooring, except 
 at the dead wall end of the building, should consist of sawdust 
 
8 
 
 THE GYMNASIUM. 
 
 or sand, about one foot and a half deep; this should be sprinkled 
 with water every morning, about an hour before the first class 
 commences to exercise, «nd again at noon if necessary. A 
 locker should be provided, where the movable appliances can 
 be securely kept when not used by the class. 
 
 The stationary apparatus indispensable is as follows : — 
 
 2 horizontal bars, 2 pairs of parallel bars, 1 pair not being as 
 wide or high as the other, 1 single trapeze, 1 pair of flying 
 rings, three pairs of ropes and a row of side rings. 
 
 The movable appliances indispensable are, Indian clubs, 
 wooden dumb-bells, wooden rifles, foils and masks, single sticks 
 and two masks, and wands or barbells. 
 
 The Indian clubs should weigh from a pound and a half to 
 three pounds each, and the wooden dumb-bells from one to two 
 pounds each. A horizontal ladder, placed where it will not be 
 in the way, would add to the appearance though not much to 
 the efficiency of the gymnasium. Apparatus, except that 
 mentioned, is not particularly useful, takes up a great deal of 
 room and is costly, so that school gymnasia at 3 east are a great 
 deal better without it, it being a desideratum to have all the 
 possible space in the building free for class exercises, and 
 besides the money necessary to purchase it would be much 
 better expended for foils and masks, single sticks, etc. 
 
 Heavy dumb-bells, cannon balls, and appliances of a similar 
 kind should not be allowed in the school gymnasiuai. 
 
 (2) Public Schools, etc. 
 
 The trustees of public schools can generally utilize the exist- 
 ing sheds for gymnastic purposes, or, if it would suit better, the 
 full attic story. Where there is no shed or attic story it would 
 be as well to build a gymnasium 60 :< 30 : where there are good 
 sheds they might be converted into gymnasia by boarding them 
 in, and placing the windows as high as possible, and as many as 
 are required, in the sides of the building. The windows should 
 
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 9 
 
 be hung on pivots. Ventilation and heating should be properly 
 provided for. The flooring should be removed and about a 
 foot and a half of sawdust or sand substituted ; the dust should 
 be kept down by sprinkling with water before being used in 
 the morning, and if required, at noon. The stationary apparatus 
 indispensable consists of three pairs of ropes only, the point of 
 suspension for such ropes to be as high as possible from the 
 ground, but not more than sixteen feet, the ropes to hang 
 about twenty inches apart and to be of three sizes, via. ; one 
 inch, one and one-quarter inch, and one and onfhalf inch, they 
 must be of the best manilla, they must not be allowed to be 
 knotted, and the ends should be finished with a crown knot. 
 
 The movable appliances indispensable are light wooden 
 dumb-bells and Indian clubs. The wooden dumb-bells should 
 weigh from a half to one pound each ; the Indian clubs from 
 thi ee-quarters to two pounds each. 
 
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 Teachers of Physical Culture should avoid all outward show, 
 b»'t should nevertheless try to become as proficient in the 
 exercises as their genius will permit. They should always be 
 courteous. When engaged in teaching they should be kind, 
 earnest and enthusiastic. They must show that they are actu- 
 ated, by an earnest desire to impart the necessary information 
 by every means in their power. They should never lose sight 
 of the fact, that the lives and limbs of the pupils are entrusted to 
 their care, and must therefore try to avoid all possibility of 
 accident, by seeing that the apparatus is secure, by strict at- 
 tention to whatever the pupil is practising, by giving careful 
 assistance when required, and by pointing out when and where 
 danger is to be apprehended, as also how to obviate such dan- 
 ger. They should have sufficient judgment to know when 
 
10 
 
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 'i 1 
 
 iji: 
 
 some of the exercises can be safely practised in the open air, 
 or when they must all be confined to the Gymasium. In 
 fact, they must never forget that the pupils are under their 
 control for the acquisition of health, and they should insist that 
 every requisite for the attainment of this important object 
 should be provided. The exercises should all be taught and exe- 
 cuted with life and animation, and while the teachers of Physical 
 Culture should see that certain rules and regulations are carried 
 out in the gymnasium, they must at the same time not forget 
 that the acquisition of skill, freedom of movement, fun and 
 mirth are its greatest charms, aiding boys and girls to accom- 
 plish tasks, that otherwise they would not have the inclination 
 or spirit to try ; while engaged at drill, however, strict dis- 
 cipline should prevail. 
 
 The teacher should, when possible, appoint a competent pupil 
 as leader, * which will enable him to move about, correct errors, 
 and give assistance in any shape that may be necessary. The 
 pupils should all be required to take an active part in the 
 lessons, and not m^^-ely be allowed to watch their companions, 
 as nobody ever le::**ned gymnastics by merely looking at the 
 practice of others. Study of any subject except that of Physi- 
 cal Culture, while in the gymnasium, should not be allowed. 
 
 Each class should have from twenty to thirty minutes 
 practice four times a week. During exercise the heels should 
 be kept together except where otherwise instructed ; nothing 
 looks more ungainly and awkward than to see one swinging 
 clubs, for instance, with the heels apart. 
 
 While performing an exercise, breathing through the nose, 
 and not through the mouth, should be insisted on, and by per- 
 severing this will eventually become a habit. 
 
 Singing or even counting aloud while practising gymnastics 
 or calisthenics should not be tolerated. Singing, however, 
 
 *Tbe leader should stand slightly in advance, back to the class. 
 
General instructions. 
 
 11 
 
 can be engaged in while marching if so desired, preparatory to 
 or at an entertainment. 
 
 Practising with musical accompaniment should not be per- 
 mitted with any exercise, unless the pupils know it thoroughly. 
 
 A choral society in conjunction with the gymnasium exclu- 
 sively might be formed. 
 
 Such exercises as putting the shot and throwing the hammer 
 should not be allowed in the gymnasium ; they are not suit- 
 able for the place, and indulgence in them is attended with 
 discomfort and danger of life and limb to the pupils, and also 
 injury to the apparatus and gymnasium. 
 
 In the fall and spring, the drill should take up the most time ; 
 in the winter, calisthenics and gymnastics. The time can be 
 divided up in something like the following manner : — 
 
 FALL AND SPRING. 
 
 For Boys. 
 
 Monday. — 20 minutes Drill. 10 minutes First Series Calis- 
 thenics. 
 
 Tuesday. — 15 minutes Light Dumb-bell Series. 15 minutes 
 Third Series Calisthenics. 
 
 Wednesday. — 15 minutes Second Series Calisthenics. 15 
 minutes Stationary Rope Series, 
 
 Thursday. — 20 minutes Drill. 10 minutes First Series 
 Calisthenics. 
 
 Friday. — Choral Practice. 
 
 For Girls. 
 
 Monday. — 20 minutes Drill. 10 minutes First Series Calis- 
 thenics. 
 
 Tuesday. — 15 minutes Second Series Calisthenics. 15 min- 
 utes L^gLt Dumb-bell Series. 
 
 Wednesday. — 15 minutes Third Series Calisthenics. 15 min- 
 utes Indian Club Series. 
 
12 
 
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
 
 !I!!I' 
 
 !i!!| 
 
 i 1. 
 
 Thursday. — 20 minutes Drill. 10 minutes First Series 
 Calisthenics. 
 
 Fri(1,ay. — Choral Practice. 
 
 WINTER. 
 
 For Boys. 
 
 Monday. — 15 minutes Drill. 15 minutes First Series Calis- 
 thenics. 
 
 Tuesday. — 10 minutes Light Dumb-bell Series. 20 minutes 
 Third Series Calisthenics. 
 
 Wednesday, — 10 mi utes Second Series Calisthenics. 20 
 minutes Stationary Rope Series. 
 
 Thursday. — 10 minutes Drill. 10 minutes First Series 
 Calisthenics. 10 minutes Third Series Calisthenics. 
 
 Friday. — Choral Practice. 
 
 For Girls. 
 
 Monday. — 15 minutes Drill. 15 minutes First Series Calis- 
 thenics. 
 
 Tuesday. — 20 minutes Indian Club Series. 10 minutes 
 Second Series Calisthenics. 
 
 Wednesday. — 15 minutes Third Series Calisthenics. 15 min- 
 utes Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 
 Thursday. — 10 minutes Drill. 20 minutes Indian Club 
 Series. 
 
 Friday. — Choral Practice. 
 
 For the sake of classification, all the exercises in this book, 
 except drill, that are performed without appliances, come 
 under the head of calisthenics ; where appliances are used, 
 they come under the head of gymnastics. 
 
PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 13 
 
 PART I. 
 
 FOR BOYS. 
 
 DRILL 
 
 The Squad Drill, as here given, is taken from the Field 
 Exercise, without alterations or additions, except that the 
 word "pupil" is substituted for that of "soldier," marginal 
 notes are given, and some changes are introduced, necessary to 
 its use in schools. 
 
 The reasons for not altering it are these : — 1. The fundi- 
 mental principles, as laid down in the Field Exercise, are so 
 simply expressed that they can be easily learned ; 2. The 
 Field Exercise, having been for numbers of years in use, and 
 having been revised from time to time by gentlemen in Her 
 Majesty's Service, by Her Majesty's command, it must be as 
 nearly perfect as possible ; 3. That the drill may assimilate 
 with that in use by the volunteers and regulars, so that if at 
 any future time the pupil should join the volunteers or Military 
 School, he will have nothing to learn or unlearn so far as 
 Squad Drill is concerned. 
 
14 
 
 PHYSICAL (lULTURE. 
 
 DEFINITIONS. 
 
 Alignment. — An imaginary straight line lying between two 
 points, or the prolongation of that line, upon which the pupils 
 are to form, or march. 
 
 Diagonal March. — A march by which the pupils move to a 
 flank at an angle of 45° with their front. 
 
 Dress. — From the French dresser, " to straighten." The 
 word given to the pupils to correct their alignment. 
 
 File. — Two pupils ; a front rank pupil and his rear rank 
 pupil. 
 
 Flank, Directing. — That by which companies march. 
 
 Flank, Reverse. — That opposite to the Direct ig Flank. 
 
 Flank, Front. — The front with reference to an alignment, 
 is the direction of the supposed enemy. Used as a general 
 term, the word signifies the direction in which the pupils face 
 when occupying the same relative position as when last told 
 off. 
 
 Interval. — The lateral space between the pupils or corps. 
 Pivot. — The flank pupil on whom, or the point on which a 
 wheel is made. 
 
 Rank. — A line of pupils side by side. 
 
 Section. — The fourth part of a company. 
 
 Squad. —A division of a company for purposes of interior 
 economy. Also, a small number of pupils formed for drill. 
 
SQUAD DUILL. 
 
 15 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 move to a 
 
 I. 
 
 Instruction of the Pupil. — 1. The Instructors must be clear, 
 firm and concise in giving their directions. They must allow 
 for uhe different capacities of the beginners, and be patient 
 where endeavour and good will are apparent. 
 
 2. Pupils should fully comprehend one part of their drill 
 before they proceed to another. When first taught their 
 positions, they should be properly placed by the instructor ; 
 when more advanced, they should not be touched, but taught 
 to correct themselves when admonished. They should not be 
 kept too long at any one part of their exercise. 
 
 IL 
 
 Duration oj Drills^ etc. — Short and frequent drills are 
 preferable to long lessons, which exhaust the attention both of 
 the instructor and pupils. The pupils should be moved on 
 progressively from squad to squad, according to their merit, 
 so that the quick intelligent pupils may not be kept back by 
 those of inferior capacity. To arrive at the first squad, should 
 be an object of ambition to the pupil. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Mutual Instruction. — A system of mutual instruction will 
 be practised aniongst pupils ; it gives additional interest in 
 their drill and prepares them for the duties of a teacher. 
 Pupils should, in turn, be called out to put their squad through 
 the exercises which have been practised, and encouraged to 
 correct any error they may observe. Lists of those who show 
 talent for imparting instruction should be kept, for reference, 
 by the teachers. 
 
16 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURK. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Words of Command. — 1. Every command niust be loud, 
 and distinctly pronounced, so as to be heard by all concerned. 
 
 2. Every command that consists of one word must be 
 preceded by a caution. The caution, or cautionary part of a 
 command, must be given slowly and distinctly j the last or 
 executive part, which, in general, should consist of only one 
 word or syllable, must be given sharply and quickly ; as 
 
 Company — Halt: Half Right — Turn. A pause of slow time will 
 invariably be made between the caution, or cautionary part of 
 a command, and the executive word. 
 
 3. The words given in the Extension Motions and Balance 
 Step (ss. 5, 11), must be given sharply, or slowly and smoothly, 
 as the nature of the motion may roquire. 
 
 4. When the last word of a caution is the signal for any 
 preparatory movement, it will be given as an executive word, 
 and separated from the rest of the C( araand by a pause of slow 
 
 time ; thus. Right — Form. Quick — March, as though there 
 were two separate commands, each with its caution and execu- 
 tive word. 
 
 5. When the pupils are in motion, executive words must be 
 completed as they are commencing the pace which will bring 
 them to the spot on which the command has to be executed. 
 The cautionary part of the word must, therefore, be commenced 
 accordingly. 
 
 6. The pupils should frequently be practised in giving words 
 of command. It will bi^ found a good plan to practise the 
 class in giving words of command, first in succession, then 
 simultaneously, the time and pitch being first given by the 
 instructor. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 17 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 Cl(i88 or Squad Drill, with Intervals. 
 
 1. The pupils will be placed in line (that is, side by side) at 
 arm's length apart ; while so formed, they will be termed a 
 '* Squad with Intervals." 
 
 2. If necessary, the squad may consist of two such lines, in 
 which case the pupils in the second line will cover the intervals 
 between the pupils in the tirst, so that in marching they may 
 take their own points, as directed in s. 10. 
 
 3. Pupils should in the first instance be placed by the 
 instructor without any dressing ; when they have learned to 
 dress, as directed in s. 8, they should be taught to fall in as 
 above described, and then to dress and to correct their intervals? 
 after they have been instructed as far as s. 22, they may fall in, 
 in single rank, and then, if required to drill with intervals, 
 be moved as directed in s. 24. 
 
 4. Pupils formed into a squad should be directed to observe 
 the relative places they hold with each other ; while resting 
 between the exercises they should be permitted to fall out and 
 move about ; they should be instructed on the word *' Assemble" 
 to fall in as they stood at first. This should be constantly 
 practised. 
 
18 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 1.— POSITION OF THE PUPIL. 
 
 41 
 I 
 
 (Cut No. 1). 
 
 The exact squareness of the shoulders and body to the front 
 is the first and great principle. The heels must be in line and 
 closed; the knees straight; the toes turned out, so that the feet 
 may form an angle of 45 degrees; the arms hanging easily from 
 the shoulder, the hand open, thumb to the front and close to 
 the fore-finger, fingers lightly touching the thighs; the hips 
 rather drawn back, and the breast advanced, but without con- 
 straint ; the body straight and inclining forward, so that the 
 weight of it may bear principally on the fore part of the feet ; 
 the head erect, but not thrown back, the chin slightly drawn 
 in, and the eyes looking straight to the front. 
 
 When the pupils fall in for instruction, they will be taught 
 to place themselves in the position above described. 
 
SQUAD DRiLL. 
 
 19 
 
 Note.— On the word " Attention," the pupils will immedi- 
 ately assume the preceding position. 
 
 N.B. — The words in the margin, printed in italics^ are the 
 commands to be given by the instructor. 
 
 S. 2.— STANDING AT EASE. 
 
 The pupils will first be taught the motions of standing at 
 ease by numbers, then judging the time. 
 
 1. By lumbers. 
 
 Caution. — Stand at ease, by numbers. 
 
 / On the word " One," raise the arms from the 
 I elbows, left hand in front of the centre of the 
 
 One. J ^^^y> *^ h'gh ^s *h6 waist, palm upwards ; the 
 I right hand as high as the right breast, palm to 
 I the left front ; both thumbs separated from the 
 Vfingers, and the elbows close to the sides. 
 
 {On the word "Two," strike the palm of the 
 right hand on that of the left, drop the arms to 
 their full extent, keeping the hands together and 
 passing the right hand over the back of the left 
 as they fall ; at the same time draw back the 
 right foot six inches, and slightly bend the left 
 knee. 
 
 When the motions are completed, the arms mus.'t hang 
 loosely and easily, the fingers pointing towards the ground, the 
 right thumb lightly held between the thumb and palm of the 
 left hand ; the body must incline forward, the weight being on 
 the right leg, and the whole attitude without constraint. 
 
 Squad — i On the word " Attention," spring up to the 
 Attention. \ position described in s. 1. 
 
 Two. 
 
II 
 
 ! 
 
 ii^.in 
 
 11- 
 
 i I I 
 
 20 
 
 Caution. - 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 Squad — 
 Attention. 
 
 If the command " Stand at ease," is followed bj the word 
 " Stand easy," the pupils will be permitted to move their limbs, 
 but without quitting their ground, so that on coming to 
 " Attention," no one shall have materially lost his dressing 
 in line. If the pupils are required to keep their dressing 
 accurately, they should be cautioned not to move their left feet. 
 
 On the word " Squad," being given to the pupils when stand- 
 ing easy, all will at once assume the position of standing at ease. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 2. — Judging the Time. 
 
 —Stand at ease, judging tJie time. 
 
 {On the word " Ease," go through the motions 
 described in the standing at ease by numbers, 
 distinctly but smartly, and without any pause 
 between them. 
 
 As before. 
 
 S. 3.— DRESSING A SQUAD WITH INTERVALS. 
 
 { On the word " Eyes right," the eyes will be 
 Eyes—Right. < directed to the right, the head being slightly 
 
 ' turned in that direction. 
 
 On the word " Dress," each pupil, except the 
 right hand one, will extend his right arm, 
 palm of the hand upwards, nails touching the 
 shoulder of the pupil on his right; at the 
 same time he will take up his dressing 
 in line by moving, with short quick steps, 
 till he is just able to distinguish the lower 
 part of the face of the second pupil beyond him ; 
 care must be taken that he carries his body 
 backward or forward with thw feet, keeping 
 his shoulder perfectly square in their original 
 position. 
 
 Dress. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 21 
 
 Eyes— Front. 
 
 /. 
 
 word " Eyes — front," the head and 
 be turned to the front, the arm 
 and the position of attention, as 
 
 On the 
 eyes will 
 \ dropped, 
 
 ^ described in s. 1, resumed. 
 Dressing by the left will be practised in like manner 
 
 S. 4.— TURNINGS. 
 
 In going through the turnings, the left heel must never quit 
 the ground, but the pupil must turn on it as on a pivot, the 
 right foot being drawn back to turn the body to the right, and 
 carried forward to turn it to the left ; the body must incline 
 forward, the knees being kept straight. 
 
 In the first of all the following motions, the foot is to be carried 
 back, or brought forward, without a jerk, the movement being 
 from the hip ; so that the body may be kept perfectly steady 
 until it commences to turn. 
 
 {On the word " Turn," place the hollow of the 
 right foot smartly against the left heel, keeping 
 the shoulders square to the front. 
 On the word 'Vo," raise the toes and turn 
 a quarter circle to the right on both heels, 
 which must be pressed together. 
 f On the word "Turn," place the right heel 
 Ij^ft — Turn. I against the hollow of the left foot, keeping the 
 J shoulders square to the front. 
 
 On the word " Two," raise the toes and turn 
 a quarter circle to the left on both heels, which 
 ^must be pressed together. 
 
 On the word '* Turn," place the ball of the 
 right toe against the left heel, keeping the 
 shoulders square to the front. 
 
 On the word " Two," raise the toes and turn 
 to the right about on both heels. 
 
 On the word "Three," bring the right foot 
 smartly back in line with the left. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Right about 
 — Turn. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
2^ 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 m 
 
 11 III 
 
 il!f 
 
 Left about 
 — Turn. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Half— Eight 
 
 (or left) 
 — Turn. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three-quar- f 
 ters — Right I 
 
 {or left) J > 
 about-Turn. I , 
 Two. Three. \ 
 
 On the word " Turn," place the right heel 
 against the ball of the left toe, keeping the 
 shoulders square to the front. 
 
 On the word " Two," raise the toes and turn 
 to the left about on both heels. 
 
 On the word " Three," bring up the right 
 foot smartly in line with the left. 
 
 On the word " Turn," draw back (or advance) 
 the right foot one inch. 
 
 On the word "Two," raise the toes and turn 
 half right (or left) on both heels. 
 
 Make a three-quarters turn in the given 
 direction in the same manner as in turning 
 about. 
 
 Squad- 
 Front. 
 
 I 
 
 After any of the foregoing turnings, the word 
 "Front" may be given, on which the whole 
 will turn, as accurately as possible, to their 
 former front. 
 
 When the pupil has previously turned about, 
 
 he will always front by the right about. 
 
 But if he has turned to the three-quarter right 
 
 about, he will front by the three-quarters left 
 
 ^^about, and vice versa. 
 
 At squad drill with intervals, the turnings will always be 
 done by numbeis, except w^hen the word " Front " is given, 
 in which case the pupil will judge the time, which must be a 
 pause of slow time after each motion. 
 
 i: 
 
 S. 5.— EXTENSION. MOTIONS. 
 
 In order to open his chest, and give freed Dm to his muscles, 
 the pupil will be practised in the following extension motions. 
 
9 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 23 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Pupils formed in squads with intervals will be turned a 
 half turn to the right, before commencing these practices. 
 
 Caution. — First Practice : — 
 
 ' On the word " One," bring the hands, at the 
 full extent of the arms, to the front, close to 
 the body, knuckles downwards, till the fingers 
 meet at the points; then raise them in a circular 
 ■{ direction over the head,* the ends of the fingers 
 still touching and pointing downwards, so as 
 to touch the cap, thumbs pointing to the 
 rear, elbows pressed back, shoulders kept 
 \down. 
 
 {On the word " Two," throw the hands up, 
 extending the arms smartly upwards, palms of 
 the hands inwardd ; then force them obliquely 
 back, and gradually let them fall to the posi- 
 tion of " Attention," elevating the neck and 
 chest as much as possible. 
 
 On the word "Three," raise the arms out- 
 wards from the sides without bending the 
 elbow, pressing the shoulders back, until the 
 
 (hands meet above the head, palms to the front, 
 fingers pointing upwards, thumbs locked, left 
 .thumb in front. 
 
 On the word " Four," bend over until the 
 hands touch the feet, keeping the arms and 
 knees straight; after a slight pause, raise the 
 body gradually, bring the arms to the sides, and 
 resume the position of " Attention." 
 
 ^•B. — The foregoing motions are to be done slowly, so that 
 the muscles may be exerted throughout. 
 
 'Letting them touch the clothes and pass close to the face as they are raised. 
 
24 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURK. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Caution. — Second Practice : — 
 
 On the word " One," raise the hands in front 
 of the body, at the full extent of the arms, and 
 in line with the mouth, palms meeting, but 
 without noise, thumbs close to the forefingers, 
 
 {On the word " Two," separate the hands 
 smartly, throwing them well back, slanting 
 downwards ; at the same time raise the body on 
 the fore part of the feet. 
 
 ( On the word " One," bring the arms forward 
 ( to the position above described, and so on. 
 
 f On the word " Three," smartly resume the 
 \ position of " Attention." 
 
 In this practice, the second motion may be continued without 
 repeating the words "One," "Two," by giving the order 
 " Continue the Motion ;" the squad will then take the time 
 from the right hand pupil ; on the word " Steady," the pupils 
 will remain at the second position, and on the word " Three," 
 they will resume the position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Third Practice : — 
 
 The squad will make a second half- turn to the right before 
 commencing the third practice. 
 
 /On the word " One," raise the hands, with the 
 fists clenched, in front of the body, at the full 
 \ extent of the arms, and in line with the mouth, 
 ! thumbs upwards, fingers touching. 
 
 / On the word " Two," separate the hands 
 J smartly, throwing the arras back in line with 
 I the shoulders, back of the hands downwards. 
 
 j On the word " Three," swing the arms round 
 ( as quickly as possible from front to rear. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 26 
 
 Steady. 
 Four. 
 
 ( On the word " Steady," resume the second 
 ( position. 
 
 I On the word " Four," let the arms fall 
 I smartly to the position of attention. 
 
 One. 
 
 S 6.— SALUTING. 
 See dotted lines of cut No. 1, p. 18. 
 
 Pupils will be practised in saluting, first by numbers, then 
 judging the time ; being turned to the right for the right hand 
 salute, to the left for the left hand salute. 
 
 Caution. — Right hand Salute , by numbers : — 
 
 On the word " One," bring the right hand 
 smartly, but with a circular motion, to the head, 
 palm to the front, point of the forefinger one 
 inch above the right eye, thumb close to the 
 forefinger ; elbow in line and nearly square 
 with the shoulder; at the same time slightly 
 turn the head to the left. 
 
 I On the word " Two," let the arm fall to the 
 ) side, and turn the head to the front. 
 
 Caution. — Right hand Salute, judging the time : — 
 Right hand [ On the word " Salute," go through the two 
 — Salute. I motions described in One and Two. 
 
 The pupils will be taught to salute with the left hand in like 
 manner. 
 
 A pupil, if standing still when his officer passes, will turn 
 towards him, come to attention, and salute when the officer is 
 four paces from him ; he will lower the hand after a pause of 
 six paces of quick time ; if sitting, he will rise, stand at atten- 
 tion, and salute. When a pupil addresses his officer, he will 
 
 Two. 
 
26 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 salute, making a pause of slow time between the first and 
 second motions, and halt two paces from him. When walking, 
 pupils will salute their officers as they pass them, commencing 
 their salute four paces before they come up to them. When a 
 pupil passes any of his officers he will salute on the fourth pace 
 before reaching him, and will lower the hand on the fourth pace 
 after passing him. Pupils should be practised in marching, 
 two or three together, round the drill ground, saluting points 
 placed on either side of them, care being taken that they always 
 salute with the hand further from the point saluted : when 
 several are together, the one nearest to that point will give the 
 time. 
 
 MARCHING. 
 
 S. 7.— LENGTH OF PACE.* 
 
 In slow or quick time the regulation length of a pace is 30 
 inches, except in " stepping out," when it is 33 inches, and in 
 "stepping short," when it is 21. In "double time" the length 
 of the pace is 33 inches. 
 
 The length of the side step is 1 2 inches. 
 
 N.B. — When a pupil takes a side pace to clear or cover 
 another, as in forming four deep, which will be hereafter 
 described, the pace will be 24 inches. 
 
 S. 8.— CADENCKf 
 
 In slow time, 75 paces are taken in a minute. In quick 
 time, 116 paces, making 96 yards 2 feet in a minute, and 3 miles 
 
 *For boys, the pace must be regulated according to the age of the 
 squad, and it should be impressed on them that they must take a full step, 
 but without straining. 
 
 fThe amount of ground stated to be covered in the above is for paces of 
 30 inches, for boys it will of course be less according to age, or size. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 27 
 
 520 yards in an hour. In double time, 165 paces, making 151 
 yards 9 inches in a minute, and 5 miles 275 yards in an hour. 
 
 n 
 
 S. 9.— THE DRUM, PLUMMET AND PACE STICK. 
 
 No pupil or squad of pupils must be taught to march with- 
 out the constant use of the drum and pace stick. 
 
 The drum will lirst beat the time in which the pupils are to 
 march when the squad is halted ; then, from time to time, when 
 it is in motion. While the drum is beating at the halt, the pupils 
 will give their whole attention to the cadence ; when it ceases, 
 the instructor will at once put the squads in motion. 
 
 In order to ascertain whether the time is beaten correctly, 
 a pendulum or a "Plummet" (or Metronome) must be used. 
 A variety of pendulums have been constructed for this purpose. 
 When no pendulum is at hand, a plummet can readily be made 
 by suspending a spherical ball of metal by a string, the length 
 of which, measured from the point of suspension to the centre 
 of the ball, must be as follows for the different degrees of 
 ma»'ch 
 
 Inches. Hundredths. 
 Slow time - - - 24 26 
 
 Quick - - - - 10 15 
 
 Double ... - 5 18 
 
 Thus arranged, the plummet will swing the exact time 
 required. String being liable to stretch, the correctness of 
 the plummet should frequently be tested by reference to a 
 watch. 
 
 The length of the pace in marching will be corrected with 
 the pace stick, the accuracy of which should occasionally be 
 tested by measurement. 
 
28 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 10.— POSITION IN MARCHING. 
 
 In marching, the pupil must maintain the position of the 
 head and body, as directed in S. 1. He must be well balanced 
 on his limbs. His arms and hands must be kept steady by 
 his sides; care being taken that the hand does not partake of 
 the movement of the leg. The movement of the leg must 
 spring from the haunch, and be free and natural. 
 
 Both knees must be kept straight, except while the leg is 
 being carried from the rear to the front, when the knee must 
 necessarily be a little bent, to enable the foot to clear the 
 ground. The foot must be carried straight to the front, and 
 without being drawn back, placed softly on the ground, so as 
 not to jerk or shake the body ; the toes turned out at the same 
 angle as when halted. 
 
 Although several pupils may be drilled together in a squad 
 with intervals, they must act independently and precisely as 
 if they were being instructed singly. Each pupil must be 
 taught to march in a straight line, and to take a correct pace, 
 both as regards length and cadence, without reference to the 
 other pupils of the squad. 
 
 Before the squad is put in motion, the instructor will take 
 care that the pupils are square individually and in correct line 
 with each other. Each pupil must be taught to take up a 
 straight line to his front, by first looking down the centre of 
 his body between his feet, then fixing his eyes upon some 
 object on the ground straight to his feet at a distance of about 
 100 yards ; he will then observe some nearer point in the same 
 straight line, such as a stone, tuft of grass, or other casual 
 object, about 50 yards distant. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 20 
 
 Front. 
 
 Rear. 
 
 Front. 
 Rear. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 S. 11.— BALANCE STEP. 
 
 The object of the balance step is to teach the pupil the free 
 movement of his legs, preserving at the same time perfect 
 squareness of shoulders and steadiness of body ; no labor 
 must be spared to attain this object, which forms the very 
 foundation of correct marching. The instructor must be care- 
 ful that the pupil keeps his body well forward, and his 
 shoulders perfectly square during these motions. 
 
 1. Without Advancintj. 
 Caution. — Balance Step, commencing with the Left Foot : — 
 
 / On the word " Front," the left foot will be 
 raised from the ground by a slight bend of the 
 knee, and carried gently to the front, without 
 a jerk, the knee being gradually straightened 
 \ as the foot is carried forward ; the foot to be 
 turned out at the same angle as when halted, 
 the sole parallel to and clear of the ground, 
 the heel just in advance of the line of the 
 
 \right toe. 
 
 On the word " Rear," given when the body 
 is steady, the left foot will be brought gently 
 back, without a jerk, till the toe is in line with 
 the right heel, clear of the ground ; the left 
 knee to be a little bent. 
 
 1^ When steady, the words " Front" and "Kear" 
 < will be repeated several times, and the motions' 
 y performed as above described. 
 
 On the word " Halt," which should always 
 be given when the moving foot is in the rear, 
 that foot will be brought to the ground in a 
 line with the other. 
 
 r 
 
80 
 
 physk;al culture. 
 
 
 
 i i' 
 
 The instructor will afterwards make the pupil balance upon 
 the left foot, carrying the right foot forward and backward. 
 
 Caution.- 
 
 Front. 
 
 Forward. 
 
 Front. 
 
 Hah. 
 
 2. Advancing, 
 
 Balancf Step, advancing on the word ^^ Forward " .• 
 
 ( On the word " Front," the left foot will be 
 ( carried to the front, as described in No. 1. 
 
 As soon as the pupils are steady in the 
 above position, the word " Forward " will be 
 given, on which the left foot will be brought 
 to the ground at 30 inches distance from heel 
 to heel,* toes turned out at the same angle as 
 when halted ; and the right foot will immedi- 
 ately be raised and held extended to the rear, 
 toe in line with the left heel, the right knee to 
 be slightly bent. Great care must be taken 
 that the toes remain throughout at the proper 
 angle ; that the body accompanies the leg, and 
 that the inside of the heel is placed on the 
 imaginary straight line that passes through the 
 points on which the pupil is marching ; that 
 the body remains straight, but inclining for- 
 ward ; that the head is erect, and turned 
 neither to the right nor left. 
 
 i On the word ** Front," the right foot will be 
 ( brought forward ; and so on alternately. 
 
 {On the word " Halt," which should always be 
 given when the moving foot is to the front, 
 that foot will complete its pace, and the rear 
 foot will be brought up in line with it. 
 
 * For boys, the distance from heel to heel will be regulated according to 
 the age of the class. 
 

 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 i\] 
 
 i: 
 
 S. 12— THE SLOW MARCH. 
 
 The three most important objects in this part of the drill are 
 cadence, length of pace, and direction. 
 
 The time having been given on the drum, on 
 the word " March," the left foot will be carried 
 30 inches* to the front, as directed in s. 10 ; 
 the right foot will then be carried forward in 
 like manner, and so on alternately. 
 
 The pupil must be thoroughly instructed in this step, as an 
 essential preparation for arriving at accuracy in the paces of 
 greater celerity. 
 
 Slow — 
 March. 
 
 S. 13.— THE HALT. 
 
 I On the word " Halt," the moving foot will 
 // // \ complete its pace, and the rear foot be brought 
 
 f up in line with it. 
 
 It is a general rule that after the word " Halt," the pupils, 
 whatever their position, will stand perfectly steady, unless 
 ordered to " Dress." 
 
 Step- 
 
 S. 14.— STEPPING OUT. 
 
 / When marching in slow time, on the word 
 
 ^ J " Step — Out," the pupil will lengthen his pace to 
 
 ^ 83 inches,! by leaning forward a little, but 
 
 V without altering the cadence. 
 
 This step is used when a slight increase of speed, without an 
 
 alteration of cadence, is required ; on the word *' Slow — Step," 
 
 the pace of 30 inchesf will be resumed. 
 
 *See note, S. 7. 
 
 fBoys will lengthen their pace about 3 inches. 
 
 £ 
 
32 
 
 
 m i 
 
 
 i! 
 
 ^li 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 16.— STEPPING SHORT. 
 
 On the words "Step — Short," the foot advanc- 
 ing will finish its pace, and afterwards each pupil 
 Step— Short. -{ will take paces of 21 inches* until the word 
 " Forward," is given, when the usual pace of 30 
 inchest will be resumed. 
 This step is used when a slight check is required. 
 
 / 
 
 Mark — 
 Time. 
 
 S. 16.— MARKING TIME. 
 On the words " Mark — Time," the foot then 
 
 advancing will complete its pace, after which the 
 cadence will be continued, without advancing, 
 < by raising each foot alternately about 3 inches 
 from the ground, keeping the body steady ; on 
 the word " Forward," the usual pace of 30 
 \ inches J will be resumed. 
 
 From the Halt, the word of command will be '' Slow. Mark 
 Time." 
 
 Step — Back. 
 
 Slow — 
 March. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 A few 
 
 S. 17.— STEPPING BACK. 
 
 Jn stepping back, the pace will be 30 inches. § 
 The pupils must be taught to move straight to 
 the rear, preserving their shoulders square to 
 the front and their bodies erect. On the word 
 " Halt," the foot in front will be brought back 
 square with the other. 
 
 paces only, of the step, can be necessary at a 
 
 time. 
 
 *Boy8 will resume their original pace. 
 
 +Boy8 will take paces about 8 inches shorter than their usual pace. 
 
 tBoys will resume their original pace. 
 
 §a«fl note, S. 7. 
 
' r 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 38 
 
 S. 18.— CHANGING FEET. 
 
 To change fest in marching, the advancing 
 foot will complete its pace, and the ball of the 
 rear foot will be brought up quickly to the heel 
 of the advanced one, which will instantly make 
 another step forward, so that the cadence will 
 not be lost ; in fact, two successive steps will 
 be taken with the same foot. 
 
 This may be required when any part of a battalion, or a 
 single pupil, is stepping with a difterent foot from the rest. 
 
 Change — 
 Feet. 
 
 S. 19.— THE QUICK MARCH. 
 
 The cadence of the slow march having become perfectly 
 familiar to the pupil, he will be taught to march in quick time. 
 
 (The time having been given on the drum, on 
 the word "March," the squad will step off 
 together, with the left foot, observing the rules 
 given in s. 10. 
 
 When a pupil is perfectly grounded in marching in quick 
 time, all the alterations of step, and the marking time, and 
 changing feet, laid down for the slow march, will be practised 
 in quick time. 
 
 Quick- 
 March. 
 
34 
 
 i^HYSICAL OtTLTUUE. 
 
 ii 
 
 S. 20. -THE DOUBLE MARCH. 
 
 Double — 
 March. 
 
 The time having been given on the drum, 
 on the word " March," the pupils will step ofi 
 together with the left foot ; at the same time 
 raising their hands as high as the waist, carrying 
 back the elbows and clenching the fists, the flat 
 part of the arm to the side ; the head to be kept 
 erect, and the shoulders square to the front ; the 
 knees being more bent, and the body more 
 advanced, than in the other marches. The In- 
 structor will be careful to habituate the pupil 
 to the pace, as given in s. 7. 
 
 As in s. 13, at the same time dropping the 
 hands and extending the fingers. 
 The pupil will be taught to mark time in the double cadence 
 in the same manner as in the slow and quic':. 
 
 Squad- 
 Halt 
 
 S. 21.— THE SIDE OR CLOSING STEP. 
 
 The pupils will first be taught the side step by Numbers, 
 then judging the time. 
 
 1. By Numhers. 
 
 Caution. — Right Close, by Numbers, 
 
 (On the word " One," the right foot will be 
 carried 12 inches to the right, the shoulders and 
 face being kept perfectly square to the front, 
 and the knees straight. 
 
 I On the word " Two," The left foot will be 
 i closed smartly to the right foot, heels touching, 
 
 One,. 
 
 Two. 
 
j-w 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 35 
 
 ;he drum, ■ 
 
 
 11 step off I 
 same time | 
 
 Squad- 
 Halt. 
 
 b, carrying H 
 
 
 bs, the flat ■ 
 
 
 bo be kept I 
 
 
 front ; the 1 
 
 Caution 
 
 ody more H 
 
 
 The In- 1 
 
 
 the pupil H 
 
 
 )ping the H 
 e cadence H 
 
 Right 
 
 Close, 
 
 Quick — 
 
 March. 
 
 c The word " One," being repeated, the right 
 One. < Hoot will be carried on 12 inches as before 
 ' described, and so on. 
 
 l' When the word "Halt," is given, the left 
 I foot will be closed to the right, as on the word 
 ( "Two." 
 
 2. Judging the Time. 
 
 Caution. — Right Close, judging the Time. 
 
 I On the word " March," each pupil will carry 
 his right foot 12 inches direct to the right, and 
 instantly close his left foot to it, thus completing 
 the pace ; he will proceed to take the next pace 
 in the same manner ; shoulders to be kept 
 square, knees not bent, unless on rough or 
 broken ground ; the cadence is that of quick 
 time. The direction must be kept in a straight 
 line to the flank, neither inclining to the front 
 nor rear. 
 
 ( On the word " Halt," the pupils will complete 
 ( the pace they are taking, and remain steady. 
 
 Pupils will be practised in closing to the left by Numbers, 
 and judging the Time, in like manner. 
 
 Pupils will also be practised in taking any given number of 
 paces to either flank, aiid halting without word of command ; 
 the command to be given thus, " Three paces Right Close, 
 Quick — March." 
 
 i 
 
 Squad- 
 Halt. 
 
 S. 22.— TURNING WHEN ON THE MARCH. 
 
 Pupils will be practised in turning to the right or left, in 
 making a half turn to the right or left, and in turning to the 
 right or left about, on the march. 
 
 _ i 
 
 
36 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 lill! !i 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 1. Turning to the Right and then to the 
 Front. — On the word " Turn," which should be 
 given as the left foot is coming to the ground, 
 each pupil will turn in the named direction, 
 and move on at once, without checking his 
 \ pace. 
 
 On the word " Turn," which should be given 
 as the right foot is coming to the ground, each 
 pupil will turn again to the front, and move on 
 without checking his pace. 
 
 / 2. Turning to the Left^ and then to tlie 
 Front. — Pupils will turn to the left in like 
 manner, the word " Turn " being given as 
 I the right foot is coming to the ground ; after 
 which they will turn to the front, the word 
 ** Turn," being given as the left foot is coming 
 to the ground. 
 
 A pupil will always turn to the right on the left foot ; and 
 to the left on the right foot. If the word Turn is not given 
 as the proper foot is coming to the ground, the pupil will move 
 on one pace more and then turn. 
 
 3. Making a Half Turn to tJie Right or Left — The pupils 
 will also be practised in making a half turn to the right or left, 
 and then moving on (without checking their pace) in a diagonal 
 direction, taking up fresh points, at once, to march on. 
 
 4. Turning to the Right, or Lefty about. — Pupils will also 
 be taught to turn about on the march, which must be done by 
 each pupil on his own ground, in three paces without losing the 
 cadence. Having completed the turn about, the pupil will at 
 once move forward, the fourth pace being a full pace as before. 
 
 Front — 
 Turn. 
 
 Left- 
 Turn. 
 
 Front — 
 Turn. 
 
 V 
 
 pgi; \A 
 
■vp 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 37 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 In Single Rank. 
 
 S. 23.— DIRECTING AND REVERSE FLANKS. 
 
 As explained in the Definitions. 
 
 S. 24— FORMATION OF THE SQUAD IN SINGLE 
 
 RANK.* 
 
 At this stage of the drill, a 1 3w pupils will be formed in 
 single rank without intervals, that is, nearly touching eadh 
 other. Each pupil is allowed a space of about 24 inches. 
 
 The right-hand or left-hand pupil being first placed, the 
 remainder will fall in, in line one after the other, closing 
 lightly towards him, turning the elbow slightly outwards. 
 Pupils must be carefully instructed in " The Touch," as in this 
 formation it is the principal guide when marching. Each 
 pupil when properly in line should be able to feel the pupil 
 to his right or his left at the elbow. The body must be 
 preserved in the position described in s. 1. 
 
 *The pupils can the first time be arranged in the following manner: Place 
 the pnpilfi in single rank, the tallest on the right, the shortest on the left ; 
 direct the right hand pupl to take one ,)ace to the front, and the next to 
 place himself one pace m front of the pupil, on the left ; then number. 
 Three will place himself on the left of number One ; and number Four will 
 
 ?lace himself on the right of number Two ; number Five, left of number 
 'hree ; number Six, right of number Four ; and so continue until all ai-e 
 in line. When the pupils are once sized in this manner, they should re- 
 member their positions, and after the first time, on the word Assemble," 
 fall in as above sized. 
 
 k\\\ 
 
 I 
 
« !l 
 
 I ! 
 
 11 
 
 " liiijili !i 
 
 
 38 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 When a squad in single rank is required to drill with inter- 
 vals, the instructor will direct the odd numbers to -take one 
 pace forward, the even numbers to step back one pace. 
 
 S. 25.— DRESSING WHEN HALTED. 
 
 Pupils will first be taught to dress one by one, then together. 
 
 In dressing, each pupil will glance towards the flank to which 
 he is ordered to dress, with a slight turn of the head, as directed 
 in s. 3 : he must carry his body backward or forward with the 
 feet, moving to his dressing with short quick steps ; bending 
 backward or forward must be avoided ; his shoulders must be 
 kept perfectly sonare, and the position of the pupil, as described 
 in the preceding section, retained throughout. 
 
 Two pupils f 
 on the right 
 and one on 
 the left, a 
 pace and a J 
 half to the 
 Front. 
 
 Slow — 
 March. 
 
 One by One, 
 by the Right - 
 — Dress up. 
 
 1. Dressing One by One. 
 
 Preparatory to teaching a squad to dress by 
 the right, the instructor will order the two 
 pupils on the right, and one on the left, to take 
 a pace and a half to the front ; iiaving completed 
 his pace and a half, the right-hand pupil will 
 take four side paces to his right ; and the three 
 points thus placed will raise their right arms 
 from the elbow, at right angles to their bodies. 
 
 The instructor, having ascertained that the 
 
 points are in line, will order his squad to dress 
 up one by one. The third papil from the right 
 
 will take one pace to his front with the left foot, 
 
 and shufile up into line in the manner already 
 
 described : as soon as he is steady, the next 
 
 pupil will proceed in like manner, and so on to 
 
 the left. The faces of the pupils, not their 
 
 breasts or feet, are the line of dressing. Each 
 
 pupil is to be able just to distinguish the lower 
 
 part of the face of the second pupil beyond him, 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 39 
 
 When the instructor is satisfied that the line 
 
 is correct, he will give the words " Eyes — 
 
 Eyes — I Front," on which the pupils will turn their heads 
 
 Front. \ and eyes to the front, the three points will drop 
 
 their hands, and the right hand pupil will close 
 
 ^ on the squad. 
 
 In like manner the squad must be taught to dress up, one by 
 one, by the left : also to dress back, one by one, by the right 
 and left. 
 
 2. Dressing together. 
 
 The pupils must next be taught to dress forward and back- 
 ward, taking the pace together, but shuffling up or back in 
 succession, the same points being given as in dressing one by 
 one. The words of command will be " Squad, By the Right 
 (or Left) — Dress up," or, " By the Righf (or Left) — Dress 
 Back." 
 
 3. Dressing without points. 
 
 When the pupils are on the alignment they have to occupy, 
 and their dressing is simply to be corrected, the word " Right 
 (or Left) — Dress," or after the word " Halt," the word "Dress " 
 only, will be given, on which they will shuffle up or back to 
 their places successively, commencing with the pupil orf the 
 flank from which they are dressed. 
 
 When no pupil is placed for that purpose, the instructor 
 should invariably fix upon some casual object on which to dress 
 his line. 
 
 It will be found most useful to accustom pupils lo dress on 
 an alignment not parallel or perpendicular, but oblique, to any 
 well-defined adjacent line, such as the side of a square parade 
 ground. • 
 
40 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 26.— TURNINGS. 
 
 The pupil will next practise in single rank, judging the time, 
 the turning he has been taught by numbers. 
 
 Pupils are never unnecessarily to stand turned to the rear. 
 
 Ill fin ! 
 
 i !i 
 
 llilitl! 
 
 S. 27.— MARCHING TO THE FRONT AND REAR. 
 
 The pupil will next practise in single rank the diflferent 
 marches and varieties of step which he has learned singly, or 
 in squad : the same general rules being observed. 
 
 Before a squad is ordered to march, the directing flank must 
 be indicated by the caution, " By the Right," or, " By the 
 Left." • 
 
 During the march, care must be taken that neither the head 
 nor the eyes are ever turned towards either flank ; that the 
 dressing is kept by the touch ; and that the shoulders are kept 
 perfectly square, and the body steady. 
 
 The squad will first be taught to march straight to the front, 
 both by the right and left, in slow and quick time ; it will then 
 be practised in all the varieties of step, and in marking time, 
 in both cadences ; after which it will be exercised in the 
 double time. 
 
 The pupil will be practised in changing the pace, without 
 halting, from slow to quick, and from quick to slow time ; also 
 from quick to double, and from double to quick. Before 
 the executive words -'Slow," "Quick," or, "Double," the 
 caution, " Break into Slow (Quick or Double) — Time," should 
 be given. In breaking from double time into quick, on the word 
 "Quick," the arms will be dropped and the fingers extended. 
 
 The instructor should occasionally remain halted in rear of 
 the pupil on the directing flank ; and, by fixing his eyes on 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 41 
 
 some distant object, ascertain if the squad is marching straight 
 to its front. 
 
 When a pupil finds himself a little behind, or before, the 
 other pupils of his squad, he must be taught to recover his 
 place in the rank gradually, and not to jump or rush to it, 
 which would make him unsteady and spoil the marching of the 
 rest of the squad. 
 
 S. 28. 
 
 Right — 
 Wheel. 
 
 Slow — 
 March. 
 
 Squad- 
 Halt. 
 
 Dress. 
 
 -A SINGLE RANK AT THE HALT, 
 CHANGING FRONT. 
 
 1. By Wheeling. 
 
 On the word " March," the right hand pupil, 
 called the pivot pupil, will mark time, turning 
 gradually with the squad, to the new front ; the 
 remainder will step off, the whole turning their 
 eyes to the left (the wheeling flank), except the 
 left hand pupil, who will look inwards, and step 
 the usual pace, the other pupils regulating their 
 length of pace according to their distance from 
 the pivot flank. During the wheel, each pupil 
 must touch lightly, as explained in s. 27, towards 
 the pivot flank, keeping his shoulders square in 
 line ; crowding must be carefully avoided ; each 
 pupil must yield to any pressure that may come 
 from the pivot flank, and resist all pressure 
 coming from the outer flank. 
 
 On the word " Halt," which may be given at 
 any period of the wheel, the pupils will halt and 
 turn their eyes to the front; on the word 
 " Dress," they will take up their dressing by the 
 right, as described in s. 25, No. 3, 
 
 I 
 
 ! -i 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 t 
 
42 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Eyes — ( ^^ ^^^ word " Front," tho pupils will turn 
 Front. \ their heads and eyes to the front. 
 
 A squad will wheel to the left in like manner. 
 
 Nothing will sooner tend to enable the pupil to acquire the 
 length of step, proportioned to his distance from the pivot, 
 than continuing the wheel without halting, for several revolu- 
 tions of the circle. 
 
 When the pupils are required to wheel to the rear of the 
 alignment they occupy, they will be turned about, and then 
 wheeled as above directed, receiving the words " Halt," "Front 
 — Dress," followed by " Eyes — Front,"* when in position. 
 
 After wheeling has been taught in slow time, i^ will be 
 practised in quick and double time. 
 
 2. By File formation. 
 
 ' On the word " Form," the right han^ pupil 
 will turn to the right ; the remainder will make 
 a half turn to the right. On the word "March," 
 all, except the right hand pupil will step off; 
 each pupil, glancing to the right, will move, at 
 the usual length of pace, by the shortest line, to 
 his place in the new front, and take up his 
 
 \ dressing by the right. 
 
 On the word *' Front," the pupils will turn 
 their heads and eyes to the front. 
 A squad will form to the left in like manner. 
 This formation will be practised in double as well as in quick 
 time. 
 
 Bight — 
 Form. 
 Quick — 
 March. 
 
 < 
 
 Eyes — 
 Front. 
 
 i It I 
 
 S. 29.— A SINGLE RANK, ON THE MARCH, 
 CHANGING DIRECTION. 
 
 Eight— 
 Wlieel. 
 
 r On the word " Wheel," the pupils will wheel 
 < to the right, as explained in s. 28, No. 1 ; the 
 \ pivot pupil turning gradually with the squad, 
 
 I iSIi! 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 43 
 
 ( On the word " Forward," the whole will turn 
 Forward. J their eyes to the front and step off at a full 
 I pace. 
 
 The instructor will give his word " Forward," when he sees 
 that the pupils are commencing the pace that will bring the front 
 of the squad perpendicular to the direction in which he intends 
 it to move ; this may be done at any degree of the circle. 
 
 In like manner the squad will be taught to change direction 
 to the left. 
 
 S. 30.— THE DIAGONAL MARCH. 
 
 \\ \ \\\ ,1 1 J .1 I } ) ,1 ,1 I 
 
 /////////////// 
 
 f /////////////// 
 
 / / // / y / / / / / / // 
 a::::f::lnt±i:::c±":ru:ri::±ni 
 
 t±±:T 
 
 V 
 
 (Cut 2.) 
 
 This march will first be taught, commencing from the halt, 
 after which the pupils when marching in line will be practised 
 in moving diagonally to either flank, by making a half turn in 
 
 the direction required. 
 
 1. From the Halt. 
 
 On the word " Turn," the pupils will make a 
 half turn to the right, and on the word "March," 
 each pupil will step off and move correctly in the 
 diagonal direction, no longer keeping the touch. 
 The right hand pupil will direct, and must 
 therefore pay particular attention to his direc- 
 tion and pace. Each of the other pupils will 
 glance towards the right, and will retain his 
 relative position, keeping his right shoulder 
 behind the left shoulder of the next pupil on 
 that side. 
 
 Half Right 
 — Turn. 
 Slow — 
 Ma/rch. 
 
44 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 r On the word "Halt," the squad will halt; 
 \_p\.Qnl \ ^^^ 01^ the word " Front," it will turn to its 
 f original front. 
 
 If the diagonal inarch has been properly preformed, the 
 squad when halted and fronted will be found to he in a line 
 parallel to its original position. 
 
 2. On the March. 
 
 Half Right 
 — Turn. 
 
 { 
 
 ( When the squad is marching to the front, and 
 is required to move in a diagonal direction to 
 the right, the word, "Half Right— Turn," will 
 be given, upon which the pupils will turn half 
 right and move diagonally in that direction, as 
 described from the halt ; when it is intended to 
 resume the original direction, the word " Front 
 — Turn," 'ill be given, on which every pupil 
 will tur his front and move forward without 
 
 \ checking his pace. 
 
 In like manner the diagonal march will be practised to th.^ 
 left, from the halt and on the march. 
 
 The diagonal march will also be practised in quick and double 
 time. 
 
 Front — 
 
 Turn. 
 
 mn 1 1 
 
 S. 31.— MARCHING AS IN FILE. 
 
 The pupils will first be taught to commence marching as in 
 file, from the halt ; after which they must be taught, when 
 marching in line, to turn to either flank as in file. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 45 
 
 Right {or 
 
 Left)— 
 
 Turn. 
 
 I 
 
 Slow — 
 March. 
 
 { 
 
 1. From the Halt. 
 
 I Pupils, when standing as in file, must be in- 
 structed how to cover each other exactly. The 
 head of the pupil immediately before each one, 
 when he is correctly covered, will conceal the 
 heads of all others in his front. 
 
 The strictest observance of all the rules for 
 marching i. particularly necessary when march- 
 
 \ ing as in file. 
 
 On the word " March," the whole will step 
 ofi" together, at a full pace, and will so continue 
 to step without increasing or diminishing the 
 distance between each other. No looking down, 
 nor leaning back is to be allowed. The leader 
 is to be directed to march straight forward on 
 some distant objects, the remainder of the 
 I pupils covering correctly during the march. 
 
 f On the words " Halt— Front," the pupils 
 Squad, Halt) will halt and turn to their original front, and, 
 — Front. \ if the marching has been properly performed, 
 ! their dressing will be found correct. 
 
 2. On the Ma/rcli. 
 
 J On the word " Turn," the pupils will turn to 
 j the right, and move on as in file. 
 
 The original direction is resumed by giving 
 the word " Front — Turn," on which the pupU 
 will turn to the front, and then move on steadily 
 in line. 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 Front — 
 Turn. 
 
 In like manner pupils will be taught to turn to the left from 
 line and march as in file, and, when marching as in file, to turn 
 as^ain to the front. 
 
 
46 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 The rules laid down in S. 22, No. 2, regarding the foot on 
 which the pupils is to turn, must be strictly observed in a 
 squad in single rank. 
 
 Marching as in file will also be practised in quick time, but 
 never in double time. 
 
 S. 32.— WHEELING AS IN FILE 
 
 Right{orJeft) 
 
 — Wheels or 
 
 Right — 
 
 about [or 
 
 Left— 
 
 ahoiiC) — 
 
 Wheel 
 
 The squad, when marching as in file, will be 
 taught to change its direction by wheeling to 
 the right or to the left, or to the right (or left) 
 about. The leading pupil will move round a 
 quarter, or half, of the circumference of a circle 
 having a radius of four feet ; the other pupils 
 following on his footsteps in succession, without 
 increasing or diminishing their distances from 
 each other or altering the cadence, but shorten- 
 ing the pace a little with the inner foot, as they 
 wheel. 
 
 S. 33.— THE PUPILS MARCHING AS IN FILE, 
 FORMING SQUAD. 
 
 1. Forming to the Front, at tlie Halt. 
 
 {When the squad, marching as in file to the 
 right, is ordered to form to the front at the halt, 
 the leading pupil will at once halt ; the re- 
 mainder will make a half turn to the left, and 
 form upon him as directed in s. 28, No. 2. 
 
 Front 
 Form — 
 Squad. 
 
 Eyes — 
 Front. 
 
 i 
 
 Head and eyes will be turned to the front. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 47 
 
 Front — 
 
 Form 
 
 Sqiuid. 
 
 Forward. 
 
 Forminrf to the Front, in Quick Time. 
 
 f When a squad, mar jhing as in tile to the 
 I right, is ordered to form to the front, the lead- 
 f ing pupil will mark time ; the remainder will 
 I make a half turn to the left, and form upon him, 
 I marking time, and taking up the dressing, as 
 Vthey arrive at their places. 
 
 ( As soon as the squad is formed, the word "For- 
 \ ward " will be given. 
 
 3. Forming to the Front in Double Time. 
 
 On the 
 March, 
 Front — 
 Form 
 Squad. 
 
 < 
 
 Cut 3. 
 
 f When a squad, marching as in file to the 
 right, is ordered to form to the front, on the 
 march, the leading pupil will continue moving 
 on; the remainder will make a half turn to the 
 left, double up to their j laces, and take up the 
 quick time as they successively arrive in line 
 
 \ with the leading pupil. 
 
 4. Forming to the Rear, in Quick, or Double Time. 
 
 — '^au d I '^^^ * 'ement will proceed as described in 
 
 Forward; or) No. 2 or No. 3 ; except that the pupils will 
 
 ontheMarch,\ make a half turn to the right, and form on the 
 
 Rear Form I right of the leading pupil. 
 — Squad. \ 
 
 J.il^. 
 
I |Miil!tili! 11 
 
 48 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ill 
 
 III I 
 
 Right 
 
 Form — 
 
 Squad. 
 
 Eyes — 
 Front. 
 
 Right — 
 about 
 
 Form — 
 Squad. 
 
 5. Forming to the Right. 
 
 aaaaaaaijLiaiiiaaaaa^ 
 
 Cut 4- 
 
 "When marching as in file to the right, and 
 ordered to form to the right, the leading pupil 
 will wheel to the right, take two paces to his 
 \ front, and halt ; the remainder will form in suc- 
 I cession on his left, and be dressed as they get in- 
 vto their places. 
 
 / The word " Eyes — Front," will be given when 
 I the squad is formed. 
 
 6. Forming to the Right — about. 
 
 4!#°° 
 
 DUD 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 ccP 
 
 Cut 5. 
 
 fWhen a squad, marching as in file to the 
 right, is ordered to form to the "Right — about," the 
 leading pupil will wheel to the "Right — about," 
 take two paces to his front, and halt ; theremainder 
 ^ will march on as in file, wheeling to the right on 
 the spot where the leading pupil has wheeled, 
 and form successively on his left, looking to the 
 , flank of formation for their dressing. 
 
 The words "Eyes — Front," will be given when 
 the squad is formed. 
 
 When marching as in file to the left, a squad will be formed 
 to the front, or rear, or to the left, or left — about, on the same 
 
 Eyes— Front 
 
 ■{ 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 49 
 
 principle as it is formed to the front, or rear, or to the right, 
 or right — about, when the right is leading. 
 
 A squad marching as in file will resume its original front by 
 the words " Halt— Front," or " Front— Turn." 
 
 S. 34.— THE SIDE OR CLOSING STEP. 
 
 The side or closing step will now be practised, the pupils 
 judging the time, as laid down in s. 21, No. 2. Care must be 
 taken that the shoulders are kept square, and the paces made 
 in a direct line to the flank. 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 In Two Banks. 
 
 S. 35.— FORMATION OF SQUAD IN TWO RANKS. 
 
 The squad will now be formed for drill in two ranks, sized 
 as follows : — 
 
 The squad will be sized from flanks to centre, the front and 
 rear rank pupils being nearly the same height. 
 
 When a squad is first sized, the following method will be 
 adopted : — 
 
 Having arranged the pupils in single rank according to their 
 heights, tallest on the right, shortest on the left, direct the 
 right-hand pupil to take three paces to the front, the next to 
 place himself three paces in front of the left of the rank, ad a 
 left-hand pupil, the third tallest pupil to place himself one 
 pace in rear of the right-hand pupil, the fourth in rear of the 
 left-hand pupil ; , then place the two next on the inner side of 
 the front-rank pupils of the formed files, then the two next as 
 
 I* 
 
50 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 their rear-rank, the taller pupil in each case taking the right ; 
 and so on. Lastly, cause the two halves of the squad to close 
 inwards on each other, and dress, the rear rank covering cor- 
 rectly ; the blank file, if there is one, to be placed third from 
 the left. 
 
 After the pupils have once be sized, they must remember 
 their relative heights, and be able to fall in in their proper 
 places, on the word "Assemble." 
 
 The pupils will take their places in succession, commencing 
 from the flank on which they are ordered to form ; each rear 
 rank pupil will be placed one pace of thirty inches from the 
 front rank pupil, measuring from heel to heel, and will cover 
 him correctly, the two pupils thus placed forming " a File." 
 
 When the squad consists of an uneven number of pupils, the 
 third pupil from the left of the front rank will be a " Blank," 
 (or incomplete) "File." 
 
 The file on the left of the right half squad will always be the 
 centre of the squad. 
 
 S. 36.— DRESSING. 
 
 The front rank will dress as described in S. 25. The rear- 
 rank will continue looking to their front, and will cover and 
 correct their distances as the front rank take up their dressing. 
 
 S. 37.— MARCHING TO THE FRONT AND REAR. 
 
 A squad in two ranks will be practised in the marches, and 
 variations of step, which have been taught in single rank. 
 
 1. Touch. 
 The front rank will touch as directed in s. 24, 
 
SQTTAD DRILL. 
 
 51 
 
 2. Covering and Distance. 
 
 While marching in line, the pupils of the rank in rear must 
 accurately preserve their covering and distance. 
 
 3. Blank File rohile Retiring. 
 
 When the squad turns to the r^ar, a blank file, after turning 
 about, will step up and occupy the vacant space in the rear 
 rank. On turning to the front, he will resume his original 
 place. 
 
 Open — 
 Order. 
 
 March. 
 
 Rear 
 
 Rank-* 
 
 Dress. 
 
 Eyes — 
 Front. 
 
 S. 38.— TAKING OPEN ORDER. 
 
 / On the word " Order," the flank pupils of the 
 J rear rank will step back two paces in slow time, 
 I and turn to the right. 
 
 On the word "March," the flank pupils will 
 front, and raise the right arm horizontally from 
 the elbow, and the rear rank will step back two 
 paces. 
 
 On the word '* Dress," the rear-rank will 
 dress by the right. Care must be taken not to 
 I move the flank pupils when dressing the rear 
 [ rank. 
 
 ( On the word " Front," the rear-rank pupils 
 will turn their eyes to the front, and the flank 
 ( pupils will drop their arms. 
 
 Close — 
 Order. 
 March. 
 
 j On the word '' March," the rear rank will 
 ) take two paces to the front in slow time. 
 
 A squad if drilling with arms will always be ordered to 
 shoulder before taken open order. 
 
m 
 
 52 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 39.— CHANGING FRONT BY WHEELING, OR 
 
 FILE FORMATION. 
 
 The front rank of the squad will wheel, or form (forward), 
 from the halt, or wheel on the march, according to the instruc- 
 tions laid down in s. 28 or s. 29. The rear-rank pupils in 
 wheeling will follow their front rank, keeping their proper 
 distances, and covering ; in forming, they will preserve their 
 diagonal position. 
 
 S. 40.— THE DIAGONAL MARCH. 
 
 The diagonal march will be practised in two ranks, in the 
 manner described in s, 30. In addition to the instruction 
 there given, the rear-rank pupils must be cautioned to preserve 
 their relative positions with their front-rank, in order that 
 they may be found to cover correctly when they are halted and 
 fronted. 
 
 S. 41.— FILE MARCHING, WHEELING IN FILES, 
 AND FILES FORMING SQUAD, 
 
 1. File Marching. 
 
 File marching will be practised as laid down in s. 31, care 
 being taken that the rear-rank pupils dress correctly by their 
 respective front-rank. 
 
 2. Wheeling in Files. 
 
 Wheeling in files will be performed as laid down in s. 32 ; 
 the inner rank must step rather shorter during the wheel, 
 especially with the inner foot. 
 
 If a squad is halted, or ordered to mark time, when only 
 some of the files have wheeled into the new direction, the 
 remainder should be taught to cover off, if required, by the 
 
 id' J P 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 53 
 
 ^liagonal march on the words '* Rear Files — Cover " ; if the 
 [word " Front," is to follow the word " Halt," the rear files need 
 liiot be ordered to cover, but will move to their places on the 
 Iword *' Dress." 
 
 3. Files forming to the Front, or Rear. 
 
 The front-rank pupils of a squad marching in files will form 
 
 Ito the front, as laid down in s. 33 ; the rear-rank pupil of the 
 
 leading file will move into his place as soon as there is room for 
 
 lliim ; the other rear-rank pupils will preserve their relative 
 
 positions with their front-rank. In forming to the rear, the 
 
 rear-rank pupils will act as laid down above for the front-rank, 
 
 land vice versa. 
 
 1 4. Files forming to the Right, or Left, or to the Right or Left 
 
 about. 
 
 In these formations the rear-rank will form as described in 
 
 15. 33 ; the front-rank pupils will move around their respective 
 rear-rank, and form successively in front of them. 
 
 A squad marching in file will resume its original front by 
 the word " Halt— Front," or " Front— Turn." 
 
 a 42.— THE FORMATION OF FOURS. 
 
 Squad with an Odd File. 
 
 98 765 4- -i 
 
 800 SQ 30 10 
 
 9aca 6E3 4n aa 
 (Out 6.) 
 
 Squad with a Blank Odd File. 
 
 7 e s 4 3 a I 
 
 tai Ba B!l B!l E?a Ba 13 
 
 Qzi □□□□an 
 
 Hggltgl SO 3^ iE3l 
 W!3L 60 4CS9 Z^3k 
 
 9a ea 40 2t=i 
 
 (Cut 7.) 
 Squad with a Blank File. 
 
 g^i§i^^|irarag^ era rra sra 3^ .^ 
 
 loa 7C3 6C3 4a 2ca 
 (Cut 8.) 
 
54 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 The squad should now he made up to eight or nine files, and 
 numbered from right to left ; and it must be explained to the 
 pupils that odd numbers are right files and even numbers left 
 files. But in order that the left four may always be complete, 
 when there happens to be an odd number on the left of the 
 squad, the left file but one, although an even number, will be a 
 right file, and the left file of the squad, though an odd number, 
 will act as a left file ; in this case the third file from the left, 
 being a right file without a left file, will be called an " Odd 
 Pile " whether it is complete or blank. 
 
 The four pupils composing a right and left file will be consid- 
 ered as comrades in the field, and will act together, not only in 
 forming fours, but on other occasions ; they should therefore 
 take notice of each other when they are told off. 
 
 Fours- 
 
 Deep. 
 
 Squad- 
 Front. 
 
 \. At the Halt. 
 
 On the word " Fours," the rear rank will step 
 back one pace of 18 inches.* 
 
 On the word * ' Deep," the left files will take 
 a pace of 24 inches* to the rear with their left 
 feet, and a pace of 24 inches* to the right with 
 their right feet. 
 
 On the word " Front," the left files will move 
 up in line with the right files, by taking a pace 
 of 24 inches* to the left with their left feet, and 
 a pace of 24 inches* to the front with their right, 
 feet ; the rear rank pupils will then close up to 
 their proper distances from the front rank, by 
 taking a pace of 18 inches* to the front with 
 \ their left feet. 
 
 Fours— \ As already described. 
 
 *0r less, according to the age of the squad. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 oo 
 
 About. 
 
 Sqnod- 
 Frord, 
 
 Fours- 
 
 Right. 
 
 vill take ■ 
 ;heir left ■ 
 ;ht with H 
 
 Squad 
 Front 
 
 I 
 
 Fours- 
 
 ill move 1 
 
 
 g a pace ■ 
 Feot, and ■ 
 eir right H 
 
 Left. 
 
 se up to H 
 >nt with ■ 
 
 
 Squad 
 Front. 
 
 {On the word '• About," the sQuad will turn 
 to the right — about, and the left files will form 
 on the right files, by taking a pace of 24 inches* 
 forward with their right feet, and a pace of 24 
 inches* to the left with their left feet. 
 
 i 
 
 On the word " Front," the squad will turn 
 to the right — about, and re-form two deep as 
 already described. 
 
 \ 
 
 As already described. 
 
 On the word " Right," the squad will turn to 
 the right, and the left tiles will form on the 
 right of the right tiles, by taking one pace of 24 
 \ inches* to the . right with their right feet, and 
 I one pace of 24 inches* to the front with their 
 Vleft feet. 
 
 I On the word " Front," the squad will turn to 
 to the left, and re-form two deep as already 
 ( described. 
 
 \ As already d< >cribed. 
 
 On the word •" Left," the squad will turn to 
 the left, and the left files will form on the left 
 of the right files, by taking one pace of 24 
 \ inches* to the left with their left feet, and one 
 I pace of 24 inches* to the rear with their right 
 \feet. 
 
 -\ 
 
 On the word " Front," the squad will turn to 
 ■l the right, and re-form two deep as already 
 I described. 
 
 *0r less, according to the age of the squad. 
 
J^ 
 
 56 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 2. On the March. 
 
 A squad on the march will be taught to form fours on tlie 
 words •* Fours— Deep," " Fours— Rip^ht," and " Fours— Left;" 
 in these formations the left files will move precisely as when 
 forming from the halt, the right files marking time two paces 
 to enable them to do so. 
 
 On the word " Fours," the rank in rear will step short two 
 paces ; if the word " Deep," follows, the right files will mark 
 time two paces, while the left files move to their places in 
 fours ; if the word " Right," or " Left," follows, the squad will 
 first turn in the direction ordered, after which the right files 
 will mark time two paces, while the left files move to their 
 places. 
 
 When moving to a fiank in fours, on the words " Half Right 
 (or Left) — Turn," each pupil will make a half turn to the 
 ordered flank, as in the diagonal march. 
 
 When moving diagonally or direct, to a flank in fours, on 
 the words " Front (or Rear) — Turn," the pupils will turn as 
 ordered, and then form two deep without further word of com. 
 mand, by the right files marking time two paces, while the left 
 get into their places, and the rank in rear regains its distance. 
 
 A squad moving to the front or rear, or to a flank in fours, 
 may be ordered to " Form Two — Deep," on which the left files 
 will fall back, or step up, into their places in file, and the rear 
 rank will close on the front rank, the right files marking time 
 two paces. 
 
 A squad moving to a flank in file may be ordered to form 
 " Pours — Deep." On the word " Fours," the rear rank will 
 incline from the front rank by a lengthened step in the 
 diagonal direction, and on the word " Deep," the left files will 
 move to their places in fours, the right files marking time two 
 paces. 
 
 A squad moving to a flank by the diagonal march may be 
 ordered to form fours to that flank. On the word " Ri^ht (or 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 57 
 
 Left) " the pupils will turn into file ; they will then form four 
 deep without word of command. 
 
 On the order to form fours while marking time, the rank in 
 rear will step back a pace of 18 inches on the word " Fours." 
 
 S. 43.— FOURS WHEELING, AND FORMING 
 
 SQUAD. 
 
 1. Wheeling. 
 
 A sq lad moving to a flank in fours will wheel to the right 
 or left, or to the right or left — about, in the same manner as it 
 wheels in files ; each four wheeling successively round the same 
 point. When the word " Forward," is given during a wheel, 
 the leading four will march straight forward in the directio^i i\l 
 which it is then turned ; the remainder following. If the 
 squad is halted, or ordered to mark time, when only some of 
 the fours have wheeled, the remainder will move as directed in 
 s. 41, on the words " Rear Fours — Cover." 
 
 2. Forming to the Front or Rear^ to the Right (or Lejt"), or to 
 the Right (or Left) — about. 
 
 When a squad moving in fours to a flank is ordered to form 
 to the front or rear, to the right (or left), or to the right (or 
 left) — about, it will at once form two-deep, and then proceed as 
 described in s. s. 41 and 33. 
 
58 
 
 PHYSICAL CTTLTURR. 
 
 S. 44.--A SQUAD FORMED IN FOURS CLOSING 
 ON A FLANK, OR ON THE CENTRE, AND 
 REFORMING TWO DEEP. 
 
 For the following practices 10 or 12 files are required. 
 
 On the 
 
 Right (Left, 
 
 or Centre^, 
 
 Close. 
 
 Quick — 
 
 March. 
 
 /. squad having formed four deep, will be 
 taught to close on the right, left, or centre ; 
 the four pupils on the named Hank, or in the 
 centre, standing fast, the remainder closing on 
 them by the side step. 
 
 From the 
 
 Right {Le/ty 
 
 or Centre), 
 
 Re-form, 
 
 Two Deep. 
 
 Quick — 
 
 March. 
 
 J 
 
 ( In re forming two deep, on the word " March," 
 the four pupils on the n'"Tied flauk, or in the 
 centre, will stand fast, tue remainder will open 
 out from them by the side step, and the left files 
 will move up to their places in line in succes- 
 sion as the intervals are opened for them ; the 
 rear-rank pupils will step up to their proper 
 
 \ distances at the same time. 
 
 These formations will also be practised on the march. On 
 the words, " On the Right (Left, or Centre) — Close," the files 
 on the named flank, or in th( ntre, will move steadily for- 
 ward at the stepping short pace, the remainder will close on 
 them by the diagonal march ; when all are closed, on the word 
 " Forward," the squad will move on with a full pace. 
 
 On the words, "From the Right (Left, or Centre), Re-form 
 Two Deep," the file on the named flank, or in the centre, will 
 move steadily forward at the stepping short pace ; the re- 
 mainder will incline outwards by the diagonal march, and the 
 left files will move up into the intervals, in succession, as they 
 are opened for them, the rear-rank pupils regaining their pro- 
 per distances at the same time ; when completely formed in two 
 deep, on the word " Forward," the squad will move on with a 
 full pace. 
 
SQUAT) DRILL. 59 
 
 S. 45.— BREAKING OFF FILES.* 
 
 A squad will be taught to reduce ica front by breaking off 
 tiles from either flank. A certain number of files (suppose 
 three) will be broken of!', as follows : 
 
 Three Jiles 
 
 on th?, lejt, 
 Rig hi — 
 Turn. 
 Left- 
 Wheel. 
 
 On the word "Turn," the named tiles will 
 turn to the right and on the word '* Wheel," 
 they will wheel to the left, following the left 
 flank of the remainder of the squad. 
 
 The front of the squad may be further reduced by any 
 number of files (suppose two) as follows : 
 
 ^ 
 
 I I I I I 
 
 Two Files 
 on the Lejt, 
 
 Right — 
 Turn; Left 
 
 ~ Wheel. 
 
 I 
 
 (Cut !K ) 
 
 ' On the word "Turn," two more files will 
 turn to the right and on the word " Wheel," will 
 wheel to the left, following the left flank of the 
 ro'^iainder of the squad; the three files already 
 in rear will mark time, then incline to their 
 right by the diagonal march, and follow close in 
 
 . rear of the two files last broken off. 
 
 Any number of files (suppose three) that have been broken 
 oH'niay be again ordered to the front, as follows : — 
 
 On the word " Front," the named files will 
 make a half turn and double up into their 
 places in line ; the remaining files in the rear 
 will incline to the left by the diagonal march, 
 and step out till they cover the two files on the 
 flank. 
 
 *The squad is marching to the front. 
 
 Three Files 
 
 to the — 
 
 Front. 
 
60 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE, 
 
 Two Files i ^^ ^^^ word " Front," the two remaining 
 to the } files will make a half turn to the left, and 
 — Front. I double up into line. 
 
 All the files may be brought to the front at once, by the 
 words " Files to the Front." 
 
 (Gut 10.) 
 
 Files that are broken off must lock up well, that they may 
 not interfere with others who may be following them. 
 
 EXTENDED ORDER. 
 
 The pupils having been thoroughly instructed in the fore- 
 going sections, will next be taught to move in extended order. 
 
 It should be clearly explained that the object of so moving is 
 to enable them to take advantage of cover, iind thus to inflict 
 the greatest loss upon the enemy with the least amount of 
 danger to themselves. They should be instructed to avail them- 
 selves, for their protection, of the slightest inequality of ground, 
 and the smallest patch of cover, and how to make the best of 
 it ; also how, in advancing or retiring, to run or creep from 
 one point of cover to another without unnecess8.ry exposure. 
 
 The squad will be told off into a right and left half-squad. 
 
 When the pupils have made sufficient progress, one squad 
 should be opposed to another, in order that the pupils may 
 more readily see and judge for themselves the errors committed. 
 
 Pupils in extended order at the halt, if not ordered to kneel 
 or lie down, will stand at ease ; on the last executive word 
 they will come to attentio.i, and proceed with the ordered 
 movement. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 61 
 
 S. 46.— EXTENDING. 
 
 In extending, as a general rule, the front-rank pupil will keep 
 the direction, the rear-rank pupil will regulate the interval. 
 
 In extended formations, each file (or pupil in rank entire) 
 will be considered to occupy a space of 30 inches. 
 
 In extending for attack, four paces will be allowed for each 
 file, i. e., an interval of three paces in addition to the pace oc- 
 cupied by the file; and the extension will always be from a 
 Hank. 
 
 When extending for skirihishing, the interval will be in- 
 creased according to circumstances ; and the extension may be 
 from a flank, the centre, or any named file. 
 
 The number of paces will in either case be specified in the 
 caution of the instructor. 
 
 [For the 
 
 Attack.) 
 
 From the 
 
 Right {or 
 
 Left) Four 
 
 Paces, 
 
 Extend. 
 
 (For 
 Skirmish- 
 ing.) 
 
 1. From the Halt. 
 
 [ The tile on the named flank, or the centre or 
 named file, will stand, kneel, or lie down as 
 ordered. The remainder will turn outward, 
 and step oflf in quick time, covering correctly 
 y without opening out. As each file completes the 
 fourth pace of extension (or gains the ordered 
 interval) it will halt, front and stand at ease, or 
 kneel or lie down, as may have been ordered for 
 \ the file of extension. 
 
 2. On the March. 
 
 The file on the named flank, or the centre 
 or named file, will continue to move straight 
 forward in quick time ; the remainder will 
 make a half turn in the required direction and 
 will turn to the front as they gain their inter- 
 
62 
 
 From the 
 
 Right {Left, 
 
 Centre, or 
 
 No.— File) 
 
 — Paces 
 — Extend. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 vals in the alignment, the wholo keeping in line 
 with the directing file. 
 
 If the squad is moving in quick time, the ex- 
 tending files, as they make the half turn out- 
 wards, will break into double time ; if the 
 squad is moving in double time, they will quick- 
 en the pace, resuming the original time, in each 
 case, as they turn to the front. 
 
 3. Increasing Intervals Between Files, 
 
 To — Paces ( If pupils in extended order ate directed to 
 From the — J increase the intervals, they will open out from 
 Extend, i j^j^^ named file as described in No. 1 or 2. 
 
 No dressing, or correction of intervals, will be permitted at 
 the halt; the instructor will simply point out the fault any 
 ])upil may have committed, without allowing him to move. 
 All corrections will be made when the squad is in motion. 
 
 On the Eight 
 {Left, Centre, 
 
 M' No. — 
 File), 
 
 — Close. 
 
 S. 47--CLOSING. 
 1. From tJie Halt. 
 
 The named file will rise and stand at ease. 
 The remainder will rise, turn towards it, and 
 close in quick time, halting, fronting, and stand- 
 ing at ease as they arrive at their places. 
 
 The file on which the squad is to close may 
 be turned in any direction; the remainder will 
 then form up in the same direction. 
 
 2. On the March. 
 
 The named file will continue to move on; 
 the remainder will make a half turn towards 
 
 III 
 
TT' 
 
 SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 63 
 
 it, and close in double time, turning to the 
 front, and resuming the quick, as they arrive 
 at their places. 
 
 If the squad is closed while retiring, it will 
 move as above, continuing to retire rear rank 
 leading. 
 
 S. 48.— ADVANCING AND RETIRING. 
 
 Squad — 
 
 AdvancBy or 
 
 Retire. 
 
 Advancing . 
 
 The pupils will move off in quick time. 
 
 lititiHng. 
 
 The pupils will turn to the right-about, and 
 step off in quick time. 
 
 The intervals will be kept from the centre. 
 
 When pupils extended are in movement and the " Halt," 
 is ordered, they will halt (or halt and front) and stand, kneel, 
 or lie down, as ordered, taking advantage of any cover. 
 
 S. 49.— MOVING TO A FLANK. 
 
 Right (or 
 Incline. 
 
 {The squad will at once make a half turn, and 
 move to the flank indicated, until ordered to 
 resume their original direction to thr front or 
 rear by the word " Advance or Retire." 
 
 If the " Incline," is repeated, the squad will move direct to 
 tlio flank. 
 
 \\ 
 
 
 
iw 
 
 \ 
 
 64 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 S. 50.— CHANGING FRONT OR DIRECTION. 
 
 1. By Wheeling. 
 
 Riaht 07' ( ^^^ squad will come gradually round on the 
 Left) ) principles laid down for a wheel in s. 28, No. 1 ; 
 j the outer tile regulating. 
 
 — Wheel. 
 
 Forward, 
 or Halt. 
 
 i The line will advance, regulated by the centre, 
 j or halt as may be ordered. 
 
 If it is intended to throw back the line, the line will be 
 turned about, and then proceed as above directed. 
 
 2. By File Formation. 
 
 ( If at the halt, the instructor, having given 
 the caution, will place the named files in the 
 direction required; on the word "Double," the 
 remainder will move across, by the nearest 
 way, to,^heir places in the new alignment. If 
 on the march, the whole will move steadily for- 
 ward till the word " Double ;" the two named 
 files will then be placed rapidly in the required 
 direction, and the remainder will move as above 
 
 \ordered. 
 
 If it is intended to throw back the line, or part of it, the 
 caution will V ; " Change Front to the Left (or Right), on the 
 two Right (or Left) Files or change Front to the Right (or 
 Left), on the two Centre Files (or No. — and No. — Files); 
 the movement proceeding as above described. 
 
 Change 
 Front to the 
 Right (or 
 Left), on the J 
 Two Right \ 
 {or Left) 
 Files. 
 Double. 
 
SQUAD DRILL. 
 
 65 
 
 DISMISSING. 
 
 S. 51.— DISMISSING A SQUAD. 
 
 JliqJit ( On the word " Turn," the pupils will turn as 
 
 Turn. J directed. 
 
 On the word " Dismiss," the front rank will 
 J)' r • , J take a side pace to the left, and the rear rank 
 will take a side pace to the right ; after a pause 
 the squad will break off quietly. 
 
 When there is only one rank it will act as a front rank. 
 
 s— «r"-^^-<4- (s—i 
 
66 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 MODES OP FORMATION. 
 
 For some calisthenic and gymnastic exercises it becomes 
 necessary to extend the class in a manner appropriate to the 
 exercise to be gone through. The following modes of formation 
 will therefore be found useful. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Eyes 
 — Bight. 
 
 Dress, 
 
 Eyes 
 — Front. 
 
 From the 
 
 right, 
 
 number off 
 
 by — Threes. 
 
 FIRST MODE. 
 
 On the word " Assemble," the class will form 
 in single rank, as explained in S. 24, Squad 
 Drill. 
 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 On the word "Threes," the pupil on the right 
 will call out One, the next in order Two, the 
 nyxt Three, the next One and so on to the left. 
 
 Slow 
 -March 
 
 (On the word " March," all numbered One, 
 remain as they are; all numbered Two, take 
 two paces to the front ; and all numbered 
 Three, take four paces to the front. 
 
 At the close of the exercise the following orders will be 
 given, and movements executed. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 67 
 
 Class 
 -Front. 
 
 Right 
 — Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 Two. 
 
 On the word " Front," the pupils numbered 
 Three remain as they are ; all numbered One, 
 advance to the front, being joined as they come 
 in line with them by the pupils numbered Two ; 
 when in line with the pupils numbered Three, 
 all halt. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 On the word " Dismiss," the pupils will take 
 a side pace to the left. 
 
 On the word " Two," the class will quietly 
 disperse. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Eyes 
 — Right. 
 
 Dress. 
 
 Eyes 
 — Front. 
 
 Odd num- 
 bers^ Four 
 paces to the 
 Front, 
 Slow 
 — March. 
 
 Odd num- 
 bers, Rear 
 — Turn. 
 
 One pace 
 Right Close, 
 
 Quick 
 — March. 
 
 SECOND MODE. 
 See First Mode. 
 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 On the word " March," the odd numbers will 
 take four paces to the front and halt. 
 
 ( On the word " Turn," the odd numbers will 
 I turn to the rear. 
 
 f 
 
 On the word " March," the pupils will take 
 s one pace to tl^e right j See S. 21, No. 2, Squad 
 (Drill. 
 
 -I 
 
 J 
 
 ii! 
 
f 
 
 Mil 
 
 '<'W' 
 
 {IB II 
 
 68 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 At the close of the exercise the following orders will be 
 
 given, and movements executed. 
 
 One Pace ( 
 Left Close ) ^^ *^® word " March," the pupils will take one 
 
 Quick— '\ pace to the left; See S. 21, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 March. \ 
 
 Even num- 
 
 bers, Four 
 
 paces to 
 the Front, 
 
 Slow 
 — March. 
 
 On the word " March," the even numbers 
 will take four paces to the front and halt; 
 
 (jlass 1 On the word " Front," the odd numbers will 
 
 Front. j turn in that direction. 
 
 Dismiss. ) 
 
 Two. j 
 
 See First Mode. 
 
 THIRD MODE. 
 
 I On the word " Assemble," the class will form 
 Assemble. </ in two ranks, as explained in S. 35, Squad 
 (Drill. 
 
 Eyes 
 — Right. 
 
 Dress. 
 
 I SeeS. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 { 
 
 Eyes f 
 -Front. \ 
 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 3, Squad Drill. 
 
 {On the word " March," the odd numbers of 
 the front rank will take two paces to the front, 
 and the even numbers of the rear rank two 
 paces to the rear. 
 
 At the close of the exercise the following orders will be 
 given and movements executed. 
 
CALISTHKNIOS. 
 
 69 
 
 f 
 
 Class 
 — Front. 
 
 Bight 
 — Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 Two. 
 
 i 
 
 On the word " Front," the odd numbers of 
 the front rank will take two paces to the rear, 
 and the even numbers of the rear rank two 
 paces to the front. 
 
 On the word " Turn," the class will turn as 
 directed. 
 
 On the word " Dismiss," the front rank will 
 take a side pace to the left, and the rear rank 
 will take a side pace to the right. 
 
 See First Mode. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 FOURTH MODE. 
 See Third Mode. 
 
 Number 
 
 offhy 
 — Threes. 
 
 On the word "Threes," the pupil on the right 
 of the front rank will call out One, the next in 
 order Two, the next Three, the next One, and 
 so on to the left ; the rear rank will then 
 number off in the same manner, commencing 
 at the right. 
 
 (On the word *' March," the front rank will 
 take four (or seven) paces to the front ; then all 
 the pupils numbered One, will take two (or 
 three) paces to the front ; all numbered Three, 
 two (or three) paces to the rear, the pupils 
 numbered Tv/o remaining stationary. 
 At the close of the exercise the following orders will be given 
 and movements executed. 
 
 On the word " Front," all numbered One 
 take two (or three) paces to the rear, all 
 numbered Three, two (or three) paces to the 
 front, those numbered Two remaining stationary; 
 
 Sloio — 
 March. 
 
 in;' 
 
■ ;, 
 
 70 
 
 Class 
 — Front 
 
 Bight 
 — Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 Two. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 the rear rank will then close up to their proper 
 distance from the front rank ; or on the word 
 " Front," all numbered Three, advance to the 
 front, being joined as they come in line with 
 them by the pupils numbered Two, when in line 
 with those numbered One, the front rank will 
 remain at the halt, and the rear rank will close 
 up to their proper distance from the front rank. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See Third Mode. 
 
 FIRST SERIES OP EXERCISES. 
 
 In this series it will be necessary to give the positions as 
 exercises and as such they are classified. 
 
 f 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 \ 
 
 See Modes of Formation. 
 
 Left-hand 
 — Salute 
 
 ^ j See S. 6^ Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 First Position in three Motions — Right shoulder and foot to 
 the front. 
 
"" ^m'l 
 
 w\ 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 71 
 
 One. 
 
 Tioo. 
 
 Three. 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 Cut 11. 
 
 Move the hands smartly to the rear, the left 
 grasping the right arm just above the elbow, 
 and the right supporting the left arm under the 
 elbow. 
 
 Half turn to the left, turning on the heels, so 
 that the back of the left touches the inside of 
 the right heel, the head retaining its position to 
 the front. 
 
 , i Bring the right heel before the left, the feet 
 < at right angles, the right foot pointing to the 
 I front. 
 
 Resume the position of " Attention," in three Motions. 
 
 Bring the right foot back, so that the inside 
 of the right heel touches the back of the left. 
 
 One. 
 
 l 
 
 Is! 
 
' I 
 
 I' 
 
 III 
 
 i 
 
 72 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Two, \ Turn to the front. 
 
 \ Drop the arms smartly to the position of 
 1 Attention. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 " First Position." 
 
 Second Position in two Motions — Right shoulder and foot 
 
 to the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Out 12. 
 Bend the knees gradually, keeping them as 
 much apart as possible without raising the heels 
 or changing the erect position of the body. 
 
 {Step out smartly with the right foot about 12 
 to 18 inches (according to the size of the pupil) 
 in line with the left heel, bringing the fore-leg 
 to the perpendicular, and retaining the left as 
 in preceding motion, the weight of the body 
 resting equally upon both legs. 
 
rm 
 
 CALfSTHKNICS. 
 
 78 
 
 One. 
 
 Resume tho " First Pos^ition," in two Motions. 
 
 I Draw back the right foot, so that the back of 
 I the right touches the inside of the left heel. 
 
 Two. < Straighten the knees. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 " Second Position," 
 
 Third Position in one Motion. — Right shoulder and foot to 
 the front. 
 
 ' (! 
 
 / 
 
 One. J 
 
 \ 
 
 Cut 13. 
 
 Step forward about 18 to 34 inches, (accord- 
 ing to size of pupil) the right knee remaining 
 perpendicular to the instep, the left knee 
 straight and firm, the foot flat upon the ground, 
 the body upright, and the shoulders square to 
 the left. 
 
wcr^^ 
 
 74 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 
 4 
 
 Resume the " Second Position," in one Motion. 
 
 One. 
 
 Bend the left knee and draw back the right 
 foot until it is 12 or 18 inches (according to the 
 size of pupil) in front of and in line with the 
 heel of the left. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 First Position in three Motions. — Left shoulder and foot tc 
 the front. 
 
 /Move the hands smartly to the rear, the right 
 grasping the left arm just above the elbow, and 
 the left supporting the right arm under the 
 elbow. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 \ 
 
 f Half turn to the right, turning on the heels, 
 I so that 
 
 \side of 
 lion to 
 
 I Bring the left heel before the right, the feet 
 at right angles, the left foot pointing to the 
 / front. 
 
 so that the back of the »'ight touches the in- 
 the left heel, the head retaining its posi- 
 to the front. 
 
 Resume the position of " Attention," in three Motions. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 \ Bring the left foot back so that the inside of 
 j the left heel to'^^hes the back of the right. 
 
 ) 
 
 Turn to the front. 
 
 ( Drop the arms smartly to the position of 
 I Attention. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 75 
 
 iSHH. 
 
 Exercise 5, 
 
 " First Position." 
 
 Second Position in two Motions. — Left shoulder and foot to 
 the front. 
 
 Oiifi. 
 
 Two. 
 
 i Bend the knees gradually, keeping them as 
 ' much apart as possible without raising the heels 
 / or changing the erect position of the body. 
 
 (Step out smartly with the left foot about 12 
 or 18 inches (according to the size of the pupil) 
 in line with the right heel, bringing the fore-leg 
 to the perpendicular, and retaining the right as 
 in preceding motion, the weight of the body 
 resting equally upon both lejs. 
 
 Resume the " First Position " in two Motions. 
 
 I Draw back the left foot, so that the back of 
 One ^ 
 
 I the left touches the inside of the right h*^'J. 
 
 Two. \ Straighten the knees. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 " Second Position." 
 
 Third Position in one Motion. — Left shoulder and foot to 
 the fr- t. 
 
 / Step forward about 18 to 34 inches, (acjord- 
 I ing to the size of the pupil) the left knee remain- 
 f. j ing perpendicular to the instep, the right knee 
 
 straight and fi.'m, the foot flat upon the ground, 
 the body upright, and the shoulders cquaro to 
 \^ right. 
 
 ■miii 
 
fu 
 
 76 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Resume the " Second Position " in one Motion. 
 
 One. 
 
 Bend the right knee and draw back the left 
 foot until it is 12 to 18 inches (according to the 
 size of pupil) in front of and in line with the 
 heel of the right. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Positions by Numbers. — Right shoulder and foot to the 
 front. 
 
 {Raising the arms tc^ the rear, making a half 
 turn to the left, and bringing the right heel in 
 front of the left, come at once to the " First 
 Position." 
 
 First. 
 
 Second. 
 
 Third. 
 Second. 
 
 First. 
 
 Sevond. 
 
 Third. 
 
 Second. 
 
 Single 
 Attack. 
 
 Come to the " Second Position." 
 Oome to the " Third Position." 
 Come to the " Second Position." 
 Come to the " First Position." 
 Come to the " Second Position." 
 Come to the " Third Position." 
 Come to the " Second Position.' 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 I Raise the right foot, and beao it smartly on 
 I the ground. 
 
 ■tffa 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 77 
 
 Double 
 Attack. 
 
 Advance. 
 
 Double 
 Attack. 
 
 Retire. 
 
 Advance. 
 
 Retire. 
 
 Attention. 
 
 i Raise the right foot, and beat it twice on the 
 < ground, first with the heel, then with the flat 
 y of the foot. 
 
 (Make a short step to the front with the right 
 foot close to the surface of the ground, then 
 bring up the left the same distance, and place 
 it firmly on the ground. 
 
 I 
 1 
 
 As before. 
 
 Make a ohort step to the rear witL the left 
 , foot, then bring back the right the same dis- 
 / tance and place it firmly on the ground. 
 
 f 
 1 
 
 I 
 f 
 
 As before.- 
 As before. 
 
 Resume the position of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 Position of 'Attention." 
 
 Positions by Numbers. — Left shouMer and foot to the front. 
 
 This exercise is the same as Exercise 7, with lohe le^t shoulder 
 and foot to the front; instead ot the right sl.oulder and 
 foot. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 Bring the hands, arms, and shoulders to the 
 front, the back of the fiugers touching, arms 
 down to the full extent; raise them to the front 
 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 f; 
 
 ■ 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 4i 
 
 i 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 L 
 
 
 
 \^t^ 
 
 i 
 
 B 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 W 
 
78 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUKE. 
 
 One. 
 
 : !■': 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 in a circular direction above and in front of the 
 
 head; thumbs to the front: then turn the 
 
 ) . . . 
 
 1 wrists, still keeping the back of the fingers to- 
 gether, and bring the hands directly over the 
 head, points of the fingers down, and thumbs 
 to the rear ; elbows pressed back and shoulders 
 
 . kept down. 
 
 {Separate and extend the arms and fingers 
 upwards, forcing them obliquely back until 
 they are extended on a line with the shoulders, 
 and as they fall gradually from thence to the 
 original position of Attention, endeavor as 
 much as possible to elevate the chest. 
 
 Turn the palms of the hands to the front, 
 and press back the thumbs with the arms ex- 
 tended, and raise them to the rear until they 
 meet above the head, the fingers pointing up- 
 wards and the thumbs locked, with the left 
 thumb in front. 
 
 ( Keep the knees and arms straight and bend 
 Four. J over until the hands touch the feet, the head 
 I being brought down in the same direction. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 < Slowly raise the body to the erect position, 
 and the arms up and to the front in a circular 
 direction, until they are over the head, fingers 
 pointing upv/ards, thumbs still locked. 
 
 {Separate the hands and bring the arms 
 obliquely back and slowly down to the sides, 
 pressing the shoulders back and advancing the 
 chest, 
 
.*) 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 79 
 
 " Third Position." 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 -Right shoulder and foot to the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 llirse. 
 
 Bring the arms to the front of the body, with 
 the hands closed and knuckles uppermost, 
 touching each other below the waist, raise them 
 gradually until the wrists, by bearing inwards, 
 touch the breast, the elbows being kept up ; 
 then by forcing back the shoulders, the hands 
 will be drawn apart, and the motion is com- 
 pleted by sinking the elbows, and smartly extend- 
 ing the arms and fingers in a diagonal line, the 
 right to the front, with the wrist as high as the 
 forehead, the left to the rear, shoulders kept 
 down and the thumbs inclined to the right. 
 
 J Raise the body by straightening the right 
 '( leg- 
 
 Bend the right knee and repeat " One." 
 
 1 
 
 (Spring up with the arms to the rear, and the 
 back of the r^ght heel ag linst the inside of the 
 left, which forms the " First Position," as before 
 described. 
 
 Attention. < Come smartly to the posii^^on of Attention, 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 In 
 
 11 
 
 " Third Position." — Lefi shoulder and foot to the front. 
 
 r 
 
 JSn 
 
80 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 First 
 Position. 
 
 \ 
 
 Bring the arms to the front of the body, with the 
 hands closed and icnucklea uppermost, touching 
 each other be?ow the waist, raise them gradually 
 until the wrists, by bearing inwards, touch the 
 breast, the elbows being kept up ; then by forc- 
 ing back the shoulders, the hands will be drawn 
 apart, and the motion is completed by sinking 
 the elbows and smartly extending the arms and 
 fingers in a diagonal line, the left to the front, 
 with the wrist as high as the forehead, and the 
 right to the rear, shoulders kept down, and the 
 thumbs inclined to the left. 
 
 "I Raise the body by straightening the left leg. 
 \ Bend the left knee and repeat " One." 
 
 Spring up with the arms to the rear, and the 
 back of the left heel against the inside of the 
 right, which forms the "First Position," as be- 
 fore described. 
 
 Attention. { Oome smartly to the position of Attention. 
 
 ^'*^o ^r?''"*'^ I See S. 6, Squad Drill. 
 Salute. \ 
 
 Front. \ As described in Modes of Formation. 
 
 ^^^Salur'^ I See S. 6, Squad Drill. 
 
 R}9li^— [ See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 T^irn. { 
 
 Dismiss. < See S. 51, Squad Drill, 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 81 
 
 SECOND SERIES OP EXBROISES. 
 
 ( The formation of the class will be as explain- 
 
 Assenihle. ^ ed in S. 35, Squad Drill, except that the rear 
 
 I rank will be three paces behind the front rank. 
 
 Right-hand-- / g^^ g g g ^^^ j^^^^u 
 Salute. \ ' ^ 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 I 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise^ 1. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, covimencing with the left foot, with- 
 out advanciug. 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Rear. | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words " Front " and " Rear " will be 
 repeated several times, and the motions performed as descrioed 
 in S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Halt 
 
 Exercise \ 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, commencing loith the left foot, with- 
 out advancing. 
 
82 
 
 Li-jL 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ( On the word " Left," the left foot will be 
 raised from the ground by a slight bend of the 
 knee, and carried gently to the left, without a 
 jerk, the knee being gradually straightened as 
 ^ the foot is carried to the left; the foot to be 
 turned to the left, the sole parallel to and clear 
 of the ground, and the back of the left heel in 
 
 \ line with the inside of the right. 
 
 Rear. | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words "Left" and "Rear" will be re- 
 peated several times, and the motions performed as described. 
 
 Halt. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, commenclmj with the right Jout, with- 
 out advancing. 
 
 Front. I See S. .1, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Bear. \ See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words " Front " and " Rear " will be re- 
 peated several times, and the motions performed as described 
 in S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 SeeS. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, commencinq with the right foot, ivith- 
 out advancing. 
 
 vsssBss^^i^sm^i^gs^isr^^issssscsvsjm^^r. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 8n 
 
 / On the word " Right " the righl; foot will be 
 raised from the ground by a slight bend of the 
 knee, and carried gently to the right without a 
 Riaht J J®"*^' ^^^ knee being gradually straightened as 
 the foot is carried to the right ; the foot 
 to be turned to the right, the sole parallel to 
 and clear of the ground, the back of the right 
 I heel in line with the inside of the left. 
 
 Rear. j See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words " Right " and *' Rear " will be re- 
 peated several times, and the motions performed as described. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 i 
 
 SeeS. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balayice Step, commencing with the left foot, with- 
 out advancing. 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 Rear. | See S, 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 Left. < See Exercise 2. 
 
 Rear. | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words " Front," " Rear," " Left," "Rear" 
 will be repeated several times, and the motions performed as 
 described. 
 
 Halt. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 I 
 
I' IFT " 
 
 84 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, commencing with t/ie rigid foot, with- 
 out advancing. 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 Bear. | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 Riflht. \ See Exercise 4. 
 
 Rear, | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 When steady the words •' Front," " Rear," " Right," "Rear " 
 will be repeated several times, and the motions performed as 
 described. 
 
 I^alt. I See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Balance Step, advancing on the word ^^ Forward." 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Forward. | See S. 11, No, 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Rii/ht. I See Exercise 4. 
 
 Bear. | See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Forward. { See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 I 
 
■^T 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 85 
 
 Left. < See Exercise 2. 
 
 Rear. i See S. 11, No. 1, Squad Drill. 
 
 The above commands will be repeated and the motions per- 
 formed several times as described. 
 
 Halt. I See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill, 
 
 Right i 
 
 about — J See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 Turn, ( 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — This exercise will be the same as 
 Exercise 7. ' 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 Caution. — Balance Step, advancing on the word " Forward.^^ 
 
 Front. I SeeS. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Forward, i See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Front. I See S. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 Right 
 
 about — 
 Turn. 
 
 SeeS. 11, No. 2, Squad Drill. 
 
 1 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — This exercise will be the same as 
 Exe, ,:ise 9. 
 
 Left—Turn. | Soe S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 '<'/■ 
 
 m 
 
 /. 
 
 {./ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^P- 
 
 Ci 
 'w 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 'U 
 
 112.8 
 
 ■' m 
 
 1.4 
 
 M 
 
 2.2 
 
 M 
 1.6 
 
 V. 
 
 <? 
 
 /j 
 
 c?: 
 
 c^i 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 rf 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 
 ,\ 
 
 'S^ 
 
 <\ 
 
 "-"9) 
 
 .V 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 '<?) 
 

 ^ 
 
Mi 
 i 
 
 86 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Right-hand 
 
 — Salute. 
 
 { 
 
 See S. 6, Squad Drill. 
 
 Left-hand 
 — Salute. 
 
 i 
 
 See S. 6, Squad Drill. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 f 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 { 
 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill 
 
 THIRD SERIES OP EXERCISES. 
 
 Each group of this series should be thoroughly learned be- 
 fore proceeding to the next. Pupils under eight should not be re- 
 quired to learn this series; and the junior classes need not go 
 past Group IV. 
 
 TECHNICAL TERMS. 
 
 Preliminary Group. — The high leap. 
 
 Group I. — Standing on the hands and head, feet against the 
 wall ; and the elephants walk. 
 
 Group II. — Hand and head stand ; and the roll up. 
 
 Group III. — Hand stand feet against the wall; and the nip 
 up, or upstart, with the hands behind. 
 
 Group IV. — Hand stand; and nip up, with the hands in 
 front. 
 
 Group V. — Hand and head stand, and raising to the hand 
 stand, feet against the wall ; and nip up, or the classical up- 
 start, with the arms folded. 
 
 Group VI. Hand and head stand and raising to the hand I 
 stand; and Ist, parallel bar exei'cise. 
 
 Group VII, Fore-arm stand ; hand stand ; fingers stand ; and ! 
 2nd, parallel bar exercise. 
 
"^ 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 87 
 
 Group VIII. — Running hand and head spring; and 3rd, 
 parallel bar exercise. 
 
 Group IX. — Standing hand and head spring; and nip up 
 repeat. 
 
 Group X. — Running hand spring ; and cart-wheel to the 
 left. 
 
 Group XI. — Standing hand upring ; and cart-wheel, to the 
 right. 
 
 Group XII. — Walking on the hands ; and back-bend. 
 
 Group XIII.— Twirling. 
 
 Group XIV. — The classical running hand spring. 
 
 PRELIMINARY GROUP. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 S. 24, 
 
 Stand at 
 Ease. 
 
 I For the formation of the class see 
 j Squad Drill. 
 
 The class will be in line, parallel to the side of the building. 
 
 f See S. 2, No. 2. — The pupils will take this posi- 
 J tion in the class until required to perform the 
 I exercise, when they will immediately assume 
 \^^the position given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 The exercises in this group will be conducted in the following 
 manner : — The left hand pupil will take six paces to the front, 
 halt and turn to the rear ; the next pupil on the left will take 
 three paces to the front and one to the left and halt ; they will 
 each hold one end of a piece of rope or a stick. The right hand 
 pupil will now come to Attention and advance till at the required 
 distance from the rope, when he will come to the position given 
 at the head of the exercise, commence the exercise, and having 
 finished it, will take the place of the second pupil from the left 
 who will retire to his place in the class. As soon as the right 
 hand pupil begins the exercise, the next pupil on the right will 
 come to Attention and advance till at the requsite distance from 
 
 I 
 
88 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 the I'ope, when he will come to the position given at the head 
 of the exercise and begin it, and having finished will take the 
 plat of the left hand pupil ; the next in order will advance 
 in his turn and having finished the exercise will take the place 
 of the right hand pupil, who will retire to his place in the class 
 by passing round and in rear of the class as described in 
 Group VIII. The rest of the pupils will proceed in like manner 
 until all have performed the exercise, when it may be repeated 
 or the next commenced. 
 
 In each of the exercises in this group the pupil must judge 
 his distance from the rope, which at first must not be far from 
 the ground, being gradually raised higher as the pupil becomes 
 more proficient. 
 
 The pupils holding the rope must let it go, if the pupil in 
 trying to clear it, fails. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of " Attention."— Facing the rope. 
 
 I Closing the hands, raise the arms to the front 
 One. < and bending the elbows bring the hands a little 
 (^ above and opposite the side of the head. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, bring the arms down, 
 keep the knees straight, and bending slightly 
 over, bring the arms which are kept straight, 
 well to the rear. 
 
 J Bring the arms down from the rear and 
 I slightly bend the knees. 
 
 {Immediately straightening the knees and 
 carrying the arms up to the front, spring up 
 and over the rope, alighting on the fore-part of 
 the feet, allowing the knees to bend a little, on 
 the feet striking the ground, and then straighten. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
■ ! 
 
 the head 
 1 take the 
 1 advance 
 ! the place 
 
 I the class 
 scribed in 
 ke manner 
 e repeated 
 
 lusfc judge 
 3 far from 
 
 II becomes 
 
 e pupil in 
 
 the front 
 ds a little 
 iad. 
 
 irnas down, 
 ig slightly 
 straight, 
 
 rear 
 
 cnees 
 
 and 
 
 and 
 
 spring up 
 ore-part of j 
 little, on i 
 straighten. ] 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 Uxercise 2. 
 Position of ''Attention."— Right side to the rope. 
 
 j I he same as in Exercise 1. 
 j The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 89 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 \ 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Fowt. 
 
 (Immediately straightening the knees and 
 carrying the arms up to the front, spring up 
 and to the right over the rope, alighting on the 
 fore-part of the right foot. 
 
 The right foot will be carried up, to the right over the rope 
 and down; the left foot will be carried to the front, up, to the 
 right over the rope, to the rear until in line with the left foot 
 and down on the ground. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Pr tion of "Attention." — Left side to the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 
 Exercise 2, only read " left " for " right " whenever it occurs 
 
 and vice versa. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — Front to the rope, but far 
 enoiigh from it to allow a short run to be taken. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, a short run being first taken, and at the end of 
 the run springing from the right foot. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 ! Position. — The same as in Exercise 4. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 1 Exercise 4, except that the pupil will spring from the left foot. 
 
 I m 
 
V. 
 
 90 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 GROUP I. 
 
 ( For the formation of the class, See S. 3, 
 i Squad Drill. 
 
 If there is not space enough for each pupil, the odd and even 
 numbers will practise the exercise alternately. 
 
 The class will be parallel to and about 45 inches (more or 
 less, according to the size of the pupil,) from the wall. 
 
 Eight about ( See S. 4, Squad Drill. — The class will now be 
 — Turn. \ facing the wall. 
 
 Stand at — j 
 
 Ease. ] 
 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Eaise the hands from the wrists sideways; 
 backs of the hands up, thumbs to the front and] 
 separated from the fore- fingers. 
 
 Keeping the arms straight, raise them to the! 
 front until they are above the head ; backs oil 
 the hands down, thumbs to the rear, and thej 
 fiingers pointing outward and upward. 
 
 Raise the left heel, and slide the left foot back! 
 until it rests on the point ; the body leaningl 
 forward, and the weight of it on the right X^i^^Three. 
 the knees kept straight. 
 
 Bend over, bending the right knee, until th^ 
 hands come to the ground ; the left leg kep 
 straight, and sliding back to the full extent (»^pfowr. 
 the point of the foot. 
 
 / 
 
V 
 
 Be S. 3, 
 md even 
 
 (more or 
 
 il now be 
 
 sideways; 
 front and 
 
 liem to the! 
 backs oil 
 , and thel 
 
 , foot back! 
 
 ly leaning! 
 
 right leg! 
 
 until tli(| 
 ft leg kep 
 11 extent i 
 
 / 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 91 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 E 
 
 ight. } 
 
 Keeping the right foot in its place, by bend- 
 ing at the elbows, ankles and toes, bring the 
 head to the ground, about six inches in front of 
 the hands; the left leg being kept straight. 
 
 / Spring from the right foot, carrying it and the 
 I left with it, up, until by bending over they rest 
 f against the wall ; the heels will be together, the 
 I legs at their full extent, the body curved, 
 I and the weight of it resting on the hands 
 Vand head. 
 
 { Spring from the right foot, and bending the 
 ^ right knee, bring it and the left down to their 
 positions as in " Four." 
 
 Keeping the right foot in its place, spring 
 from the hands to the position of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 1 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 \Thr 
 
 ee. 
 
 "our. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Raise the right heel, and slide the right foot 
 back until it rests on the point ; the body lean- 
 ing forward, and the W3ight of it on the left leg; 
 the knees kept straight. 
 
 Bend over, bending the left knee, until the 
 hands come to the ground ; the right leg kept 
 straight, and sliding back to the full extent on 
 the point of the foot 
 
 w 
 
 
 I mm i 
 
92 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 f Keeping the left foot in its place, by bending 
 at the elbows, ankles and toes, bring the head 
 to the ground, about six inches in front of the 
 hands ; the right leg being kept straight. 
 
 Spring from the left foot, carrying it and the 
 right with it, up, until by bending over they 
 rest against the wall ; the heels will be together, 
 the legs at their full extent, the body curved, 
 and the weight of it resting on the hands 
 and head. 
 
 Spring from the left foot, and bending the 
 left knee, bring it and the right foot down to 
 their position as in " Four/* 
 
 Keeping the left foot in its place, spring from | 
 the hands to the position of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Five. J 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 j Bend over, bending the knees, until the liandij 
 ( come to the ground. 
 
 ( Bending the elbows, ankles and toes, bri 
 ( the head to the ground. 
 
 Slightly sinking the knees, immediately spr 
 from both feet, carrying them up, until b^ 
 bending over they rest against the wall ; thij 
 heels together, the legs at their full extent, th« 
 body curved, and the weight of it resting 
 the hands and bead. 
 
 Sic 
 
 (or Q\ 
 
 Ha 
 
 \ 
 
y bending 
 the head 
 nt of the 
 ht. 
 
 it and the 
 over they 
 } together, 
 dy curved, 
 the hands 
 
 snding the 
 , down to 
 
 pring from 
 1. 
 
 l1 the handi| 
 toes, brii 
 
 ately sprics 
 , until b^ 
 B wall ; m 
 [ extent, thij 
 ; resting oa 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 93 
 
 Six. 
 
 Class — 
 Front 
 
 ( Spring from both feet, and bending the knees, 
 
 ^ bring them to their position as in " Three," and 
 
 immediately come to the position of Attention. 
 
 1 
 
 I See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Cut 14. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 ( Keep the arms straight and raise them above 
 ( the head. 
 
 Bend over and bring the hands to the ground, 
 considerably in front of the feet ; the knees 
 and arras kept straight. 
 
 {On the word *' March," the left foot and arm 
 will be carried forward together, the knees and 
 arms kept straight ; {see Cut 14) as soon as they 
 have cocae to the ground, the right foot and hand 
 will be carried forward, the knees and arms 
 kept straight, and so on alternately. 
 
 ( On the word " Halt," the moving foot and 
 -/ hand will complete their pace, and the rear foot 
 f and hand be brought up in line with them. 
 
 Slow 
 r Quic 
 -March. 
 
 Halt. 
 
 ill ■';" 
 
 
I 
 
 pii 
 
 94 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ( Bend the elbows slij^htly, bringing the head 
 I and shoulders a little forward. 
 I Spring from the hands, coming immediately 
 ( to the position of Attention. 
 
 ^Tur^ { ^^^ ^- ^' ^^"^"^ ^"^^• 
 Dismiss. \ See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP II. 
 
 Assemble. \ See Group I. 
 
 Right about {an r 
 
 -Turn. \ S««G'-'»"Pl- 
 
 ^ I See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 1 , Group I. 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 \ The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 •| The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 \ The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I, except 
 that the feet will not touch the wall, the body 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 /Seven. 
 
 ) 
 
 ( balancing on the hands and head. 
 f Bending the right knee, bring the feet down 
 < to the place they first occupied, immediately 
 ' coming to the position of Attention. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 95 
 
 m 
 
 Position 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 
 i 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 Position 
 One 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 of " Attention." 
 
 \ The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 / The same as in Exercise 2, Group I, except 
 J that the feet will not touch the wall, the body 
 
 ( balancing on the hands and head, 
 
 ( Bending the left knee, bring the feet down 
 ^ to the place they first occupied, immediately 
 
 ' coming to the position of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 of " Attention." 
 
 \ The same as in Exercise 1, C\ ;up T. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exerci^o 3, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I, except 
 at the feet will not touch the wall, the body 
 ( balancing on the hands and head. 
 / Bending both knees, bring the feet down to 
 < the place they first occupied, immediately 
 ' coming to the position of Attention. 
 
 I See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 
 ,f 
 
 (! 
 
1 
 
 96 
 
 Position 
 be fully e:; 
 the sides. 
 
 One. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 . — Lying down on the back, the body and limbs will 
 tended ; the heels together, and the arms close to 
 
 I Bring the body up to the sitting position. 
 
 Roll on to the back, throwing the hands 
 quickly up, and separating the fingers and 
 thumbs, bring them to the ground behind and 
 ''lose to the shoulders ; and at the same time 
 bring the feet over and behind the head. 
 
 i Bring the hands and feet forward and down, 
 ( and the body up, coming to the sitting position, 
 f Bring the body down, coming to the position 
 ) given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 Come to the sitting position, bend the knees 
 and cross the legs, bring the feet close to the 
 body and without using the hands, by bending 
 the body well forward and straightening the 
 knees, come to the position of Attention. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 5i, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Right about j 
 
 — Turn. \ 
 
 Stand at— ( 
 
 Ease. \ 
 
 GROUP III. 
 See Group I. 
 See Group I. 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 97 
 
 Out 15. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 1, Group I, 
 •j The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 I The sathe as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 I The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Slightly bend the elbows and sink the right 
 knee. 
 
 Spring from the right foot, and straightening 
 the elbows, carry it and the left with it up, until 
 by bending over they rest against the wall ; the 
 heels will be together, the legs and arms at their 
 full extent, the body curved, and the weight of it 
 .resting on the hands. (See Cut 15.) 
 
 
98 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 
 •■ t 
 
 
 Seven. 
 Eight. 
 
 Position 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 Eight. 
 
 Position 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 ■j The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 of " Attention." 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 I The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 ( Slightly bend the elbows and sink the left 
 
 1 knee. 
 
 Spring from the left foot, and straightening 
 the elbows, carry it and the right with it up, 
 until by bending over they rest against the 
 v» all ; the heels must be together, the legs and 
 arms at their full extent, the body curved, and 
 the weight of it resting on the hands. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 2, GronD I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 of "Attention." 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I, 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 Slightly bend the elbows and sink the knees. 
 
■*. 1 
 
 i 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 99 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 {Spring from both feet, and straightening the 
 elbows, carry them up until by bending over 
 they rest against the wall ; the heels will be 
 together, the legs and arms at their full extent, 
 the body curved, and the weight of it resting 
 on the hands. 
 Y Spring from both feet, and beifding the knees, 
 <| bring them to their original position, and im- 
 ( mediately come to the position of Attention. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 { 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Cut 16. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 One. < The same as in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 Two. \ Thesame as in Exercite 4, Group IT. 
 
100 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 / Commencing to bring the legs forward, spring 
 
 I upwards from the hands and shoulders, (See 3, 
 
 I Cut 16)y curve the body, and endeavouring to 
 
 Three. \ help the spring from the hands and shoulders, 
 
 by throwing the shoulders and arms forward, 
 
 raise the body, coming to the position of 
 
 I Attention. {See 4, Gut 16.) 
 
 To bring the feet as far under the body and to the ground 
 as quickly as possible, is the principal means of accomplishing 
 this feat. 
 
 The less pause there is between the numbers, the more 
 chance there is of succeeding. 
 
 Right — 
 Tv/rn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 •{ 
 
 Assemble, 
 
 Right about 
 
 — Turn. 
 
 Stand at — | 
 
 Ease. I 
 
 GROUP IV. 
 See Group I. 
 See Group I. 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 1, Group I IT, 
 except that the body will balance on the hands without the 
 feet touching the wall ; and, bending the right knee, the feet 
 will be brought down to the place they first occupied, tLe 
 pupil coming smartly to the position of Attention. 
 
! pi 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 101 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be the S'.me as Exercise 2, Group III, 
 except that the body will balance on the hands without the 
 feet touching the wall; and, bending the left knee, the feet 
 will be brought down to the place they first occupied, the 
 pupil coming smartly to the position of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Position of ** Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 3, Group III, 
 except that the body will balance on the hands without the 
 feet touching the wall ; and, bending both knees the feet will 
 be brought down to the place they first occupied, the pupil 
 coming smartly to the position of Attention. 
 
 ^Frord^ { See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 One. 
 
 f 
 
 The same as in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 Two. 
 
 D HI, ■ 
 
 
 kt the ■ 
 
 
 e feet ■ 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 ( Roll on to the back, raising the arms from 
 ^ the elbows and bringing the feet over and be- 
 • hind the head, the legs pressing on the hands. 
 
 ' Commencing to bring the legs forward, spring 
 upwards from the shoulders, giving the legs a 
 quick shove from the hands, curve the body. 
 Three. \ bringing the feet quickly down and underneath 
 the body, and endeavouring to help the spring 
 from the shoulders, raise the body, coming to 
 the position of Attention. 
 
 \ 
 
 I 
 \ 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 K i 
 
 H: 
 
 rw: 
 
102 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 GROUP V. 
 
 Assemble 
 
 . < See Group I. 
 
 I ^ m \ See Group I. 
 about— 1 urn \ ^ 
 
 __^^ < See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 •! The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The samp as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 7'wo. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven, 
 
 Fight. 
 
 Nine. 
 Ten, 
 
 i Straightening the elbows, raise the body to 
 ' its full extent, letting the feet slide upwards 
 y against the wall. 
 
 1^ Slowly bend the elbows, letting the head 
 down to the ground, and keeping the feet 
 I against the wall. 
 
 I The same as "Seven," in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 i The same as " Eighf.," in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
■ym 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 103 
 
 Exercise 2, 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Pi 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 Fight. 
 Nine. 
 
 Ten. 
 
 Position of 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 
 (( 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 "'"he same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1 . 
 
 The same as " Seven," in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 
 The same as " Eight," in Exercise 2, Group 1. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Attention." 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group T. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 The same as " Seven," in Exercise 1. 
 The same as " Eight," in Exercise 1. 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 I 
 
104 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Eight. -j The same as "Six/ in Exercise 3, (iroup I. 
 
 ^^o~T I ^^^ ^" ■*' ®4"^^ Drill. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Class- 
 
 Ft 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 4, Group II, except that 
 the arms will be folded across the breast. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two, 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Keeping the legs and heels motionless in 
 their position, slowly raise the body, without 
 the use of the hands or arms, to the sitting 
 position. 
 
 j Keeping the arms folded, roll on to the back, 
 \ bringing the feet over and behind the head. 
 
 ^ Commencing to bring the legs forward, spring 
 upwards from the shoulders, curve the body, 
 bringing the feet quickly down and underneath 
 
 ^the body, and endeavouring to help the spring 
 from the shoulders, raise the body erect on the 
 feet. 
 
 [ Unfold the arms and drop them to the sides, 
 ' coming to the position of Attention. 
 
 { 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Dismiss, i See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Right about 
 — Turn, 
 Stmid at 
 — Ease. 
 
 GROUP VI. 
 See Group T 
 See Group I. 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 105 
 
 Position 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 Nine. 
 
 Position 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 of " Attention." 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group 1. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group II. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, raise the body to 
 I its full extent, balancing on the hands. 
 
 ( Slowly bend the elbows, letting the head 
 % down to the ground, and balancing on the hands 
 ( and head. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 The same as " Seven," in Exercise 1, Group II. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 of •' Attention." 
 
 / 
 1 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 2, Group TI. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, 
 
 t- t * 
 
106 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 '■' I 
 
 Eiyht i 
 
 Nine, < 
 
 Position of * 
 
 One. I 
 
 Two. I 
 
 Three. j 
 
 Four. ■ 
 
 { 
 
 Five. I 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight 
 
 Class — ( 
 Front. \ 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as "Seven," in Exercise 2, Group II. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Attention." 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 1, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group I. 
 The same as in Exercise 3, Group II. 
 The same as "Seven," Exercise 1. 
 The same as "Eight," Exercise 1. 
 The same as " Six," in Exercise 3, Group II. 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 •n' ••■«N. 
 
 
 4 I 
 
 ..•..V....Vk._ 
 
 \ \\ ,'.•/• ,-•• s 
 
 '^- — 
 
 ^** ■"■■i iiiB II 
 
 
 i 
 
 Cut 17. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 ( Slowly bending the knees, bring them gently 
 i to the ground ; the heels must be kept together. 
 
 One. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 107 
 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Fottr. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 i- 
 
 Throwing the arms to the front, ?'oll on to the 
 chest and hands ; the elbows will be bent, the 
 \ hands a little outside of and in line with the 
 ! shoulders, and the fingers pointing forward. 
 
 j Straighten the knees, bringing them from the 
 1 ground, the legs resting on the point of the feet. 
 
 ( Keeping the knees straight, raise the body as 
 - high as possible by straightening the elbows. 
 ( (See 4, Cut 17.) 
 
 I Keeping the knees straight, sink the body to 
 
 < the ground by bending the elbows; the face 
 
 (^should just touch the ground. {See 6, Cut 17.) 
 
 \ The same as " Four." 
 
 ( Bend the knees bringing them to the ground 
 J and springing from the hands come to the kneel- 
 I ing position. 
 
 (Draw the fore-part of the feet as far under 
 the legs as possible, bring the body back and 
 slowly raise it erect on the feet by gradually 
 
 straightening the knees. 
 
 Four and Five should be repeated three or four times. The 
 slower they are done the more difficult the exercise becomes. 
 They should be repeated both in quick and slow time. 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 { 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 N 
 
 
 ! i:. 
 
 -I- 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 •It 
 
 
 1 
 
 
>■' I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 il 
 
 I 
 
 108 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Eight about 
 
 — Turn. 
 
 Stand at — 
 
 Base. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 GROUP VII. 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 Bend over and place the hands on the ground. 
 
 Place the fore-arms on the ground. 
 
 Spring from either the right or the left foot, 
 carry it and the other with it up, until by bend- 
 ing over, they balance the body on the fore- 
 arms. 
 
 Bending the right, or the left knee, bring the 
 feet and knees down to the place they first 
 occupied and straightening the elbows, spring 
 from the hands, coming at once to the position 
 of Attention. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 Raise the arms to their full extent above the 
 One. ■[ head, draw back the left foot and rest the weight 
 
 Two. 
 
 y..^.. „.„.„.__. 
 
 ( of the body on it ; the chest well advanced. 
 
 Commencing to bend the body to the front, 
 and bringing the arms and shoulders forward and 
 down, the right knee slightly bending, spring 
 from both feet on to the hands, and carry the 
 feet up until by bending over they balance the 
 body over the hands. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 109 
 
 Th 
 
 free. 
 
 Slightly bend the elbows, and raise the head, 
 bringing the shoulders slightly forward, the 
 balance will be destroyed and the legs and feet 
 commencing to return to the ground, spring 
 smartly from the hands on to the feet, coming 
 at once to the position of Attention. 
 
 Without coming to Attention, " Two " and " Three " may be 
 repeated several times without pausing. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention. 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 2, except that in 
 " One," the right foot will be drawn back, and the weight of the 
 body on it ; and in " Two," read the left knee slightly bending, 
 instead of the right knee slightly bending. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 1, Group IV., 
 except that the body instead of balancing on the palms of the 
 hands and fingers will balance on the fingers and thumbs, they 
 being spread apart. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 2, Group IV., 
 except that the body instead of balancing on the palms of the 
 hands and fingers, will balance on the fingers and thumbs, 
 they being spread apart. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 { 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
no 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUUK. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 I The same as Exercise 4, Uroup VI. 
 
 Throwing the arras down roll on to theehestand * 
 hands ; the arms bent at the elbows, the hands 
 being a little in advance of the waist, the fingers 
 tiirned out, thumbs in front. 
 
 I The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 I The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 I The same as " Four." 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 " Four" and "Five," should be repeated 3 or 4 times. They 
 should be repeated both in quick and slow time. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 Eight. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 Sees. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP VIII. 
 
 Assemhle. \ See Group I. 
 
 ^—eLT I ^^® Preliminary Group. 
 
 In the first three exercises of this Group, and also Groups X. 
 
CALISTHKNICS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 and XIV., if the building is not wide enough to allow a short 
 lun to be taken, the right hand pupil will come to Attention, 
 take three paces to the front, halt, and turn to the left ; as 
 soon as he has tried the exercise, he will walk on till he comes 
 to the left of the class, when he will wheel to the left and con- 
 tinue on till he comes to the rear of the class, when he will 
 again wheel to the left, walking on in rear of the class until 
 opposite to his place, he will then turn to the front and step 
 up to his place, halt, and stand at ease. As soon as the right 
 hand pupil has commenced to run, the next on the right will 
 take three paces to the front, halt, and turn to the left, and as 
 soon as the first pupil commences to walk away, he will com- 
 mence the exercise, etc., the next to the right taking three 
 paces to the front, etc., and so on to the pupil in the centre of 
 the class. 
 
 The left hand pupil will then step three paces to the front, 
 halt, and turn to the right, try the exercise, walk on till he comes 
 to the right of the class, wheel to the right, continue on till in 
 rear of the class, wheel again to the right, walk in rear of the class 
 until opposite his place, turn to the front, and step up to his 
 place, halt, and stand at ease. As soon as the left hand pupil 
 has commenced to run, ohe next on the left will take three 
 paces to the front, halt, and turn to the right. He will then 
 commence the exercise as the other walks away, proceeding as 
 described. When the pupils have all tried the exercise, the 
 teacher may direct one, or all, to repeat it if necessary. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Bear in mind that the left foot is to be the foot to start 
 from, 
 
 In ' '^ 
 
112 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURK. 
 
 
 i. 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^5 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Take a short run, and at the end of the run 
 when the left foot is coming to the ground, 
 bending the elbows throw the hands up above 
 the head, the chest well advanced and the 
 shoulders thrown back, the body slightly curved 
 to the rear ; at the same time springing up 
 and a little backwards on the ball of the left 
 foot, the foot scarcely leaving the ground. 
 
 And instantaneously bringing the right foot 
 to the front, spring from the left foot on to the 
 right, throwing the left up to the rear and 
 bringing the body well forward and commencing 
 to bend over. 
 
 Instantly spring from the right foot, throwing 
 it up to the rear, on to the hands, and allowing 
 the elbows to bend still more, bring the head to 
 the ground. 
 
 The body being curved, and the feet being 
 carried up to the rear and over to the front, as 
 they are coming down, spring from the hands 
 and head to the feet, resuming the position of 
 Attention. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise is the same as Exercise 1, except read "right 
 foot " for " left foot " and vice versa. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Take a short run, and at the end of the run 
 when the right (or left) foot is coming to the 
 ground, throw the hands up above the head, the 
 chest well advanced, the shoulders thrown back, 
 
-%v 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 113 
 
 One. 
 
 -i 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 and the body curved to the rear; at the same time 
 springing up on the ball of the right (or left) 
 foot, the foot scarcely leaving the ground, bring 
 the right (or left) foot instantly in line with the 
 left (or right) foot, and alight on both feet. 
 
 Instantly bringing the body and arms forward 
 and commencing to bend over, spring from both 
 feet on to the hands, and allowing the elbows to 
 bend still more, bring the head to the ground. 
 
 The same as "Four," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 ( 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 Nine. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 I The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 / Straighten the knees, bringing them from the 
 ground, and drawing the feet forward until the 
 ( legs rest on the fore-part ; the heels together. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 / Sliding the feet back and allowing the elbows 
 ■I to gradually bend, bring the fore-arms and body 
 \ to the ground, the face just touching the ground. 
 / Drawing the body forward and gradually 
 <^ straightening the elbows, raise it to the position 
 I in " Four." 
 
 / Continuing to draw the body forward, 
 gradually turn the hands sideways, until they are 
 ( nearly opposite the waist. 
 
 i The same as " Five," in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 \ The same as " Four." 
 
 riti 
 
in I 
 
 114 
 
 Ten. 
 
 Eleoeri. 
 
 Twelve. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 {. 
 
 Di 
 
 ■smiss. 
 
 \ 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Sliding the body back on the fore-part of the 
 feet until turning gradually the fingers point 
 foi ward and the hands are a little outside of and 
 in line with the shoulders. 
 
 The same as "Five," in Exercise 4, Group VI. 
 
 Roll smartly on to the back and quickly come to 
 the feet by Exercise 4, Group III., IV., or V. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 GROUP IX. 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of •' Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same m; ler as 
 Exercise 1, Group VIII., but without the run, the lelt foot 
 being in front. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 2, Group VIII., but without the run, the right foot 
 being in front. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3, Group VIII., but without the run, both feet being 
 in line ; as the hands are thrown up spring on both feet, 
 scarcely leaving the ground, and alight on the fore-part of the 
 feet, and, as the body and arms come forward and bend over, 
 spring from both feet, etc, 
 

 :i 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 115 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 Position. — See Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 4, Group III., ex 
 cept that instead of endeavouring to come up standing, on the 
 feet coming to the ground immediately spring back on to the 
 hands and shoulders, and then spring from the hands and 
 shoulders to the feet, coming up to the position of Attention. 
 
 If repeated three or four times, before coming to the position 
 of Attention, this is a very attractive looking exercise. 
 
 Right— ( 
 Turn. I 
 
 Dismiss 
 
 iss. I 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at— 
 Ease. 
 
 { 
 
 GROUP X. 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Preliminary Group, and Group VIII. 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Cut IS. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as Exer- 
 cise 1. Group VIII., except that the head will not touch the 
 ground. 
 
 ii'. 
 
 i: 
 
, 
 
 116 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 2, Group VIII., except that the head will not touch 
 the ground. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3, Group VIII., except that the head will not touch 
 the ground! 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 
 < 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 f Carry the left foot and arm out to the left, 
 the palm of the hand towards the floor, thumb 
 pointing to the left, the left shoulder lowered 
 and the right raised ; the right arm raised 
 above the head and slightly bent at the elbow, 
 the palm of the hand towards the left, thumb to 
 the rear. 
 
 4 Spring to the left on to the hands, carrying 
 \ the feet up and over to the left, and springing 
 (^ from the hands bring the feet to the ground. 
 
 ) Come to the position of Attention. 
 
 This exercise may be repeated several times in succession, 
 going in a straight line to the left, or round in a circle. 
 
CALISTHENICS, 
 
 117 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 I SeeS. 4, Squad Drill. 
 Dismiss. < See S. 51, Squad Drill, 
 
 GROUP XI. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position of ** Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, Group X., but without the run, the left foot being 
 in front ; it may be repeated several times in succession, going 
 straight to the front. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 2, Group X., but without the run, the right foot being 
 in front ; it may be repeated several times in succession, going 
 straight to the front. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3, Group, X., but without the run, both feet being in 
 line; as the hands are thrown up, spring on both feet, scarcely 
 
 
 r " 
 
 I ■ 
 
 
 II 1 "T 
 
I :i 
 
 118 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 leaving the ground, and alight on the fore-part of the feet, and 
 as the body and arms instantly come forward and bend ovor, 
 spring from both feet, etc. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner ns 
 Exercise 4, Group X., only read "Right" for '* Left " wlierox or 
 it occurs and vice versa. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 See S 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Dismiss. \ See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP XII. 
 
 Assemble. \ See Group I. 
 
 j See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 2, Group VII. 
 Two. \ The same as in Exercise 2, Group VII. 
 Thi-ee. I Walk on the hands to the front. 
 Four. I The same as " Three," Exercise 2, Group VII. 
 

 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 119 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 3, Group Vll. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 3, Group VII. 
 I Walk on the hands to the rear. 
 
 I Allow the feet to overbalance and spring from 
 % the hands to the feet, coming to the position of 
 y Attention. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Cut 19. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — Standing with the back to the 
 wall, distant 24 inches, more or less, according to the size of the 
 pupil, from it. 
 
 One, 
 
 { 
 
 Turn the backs of the hands to the front, 
 
120 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Rigid. — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 j 
 
 / Smartly throw the arms up in front bending 
 ) the elbows and bringing the hands above and 
 \ a little behind the head, backs of the hands 
 ^ down, and fingers pointing to the rear. 
 
 Bend over backwards bringing the hands to 
 I the wall. {See Cut 19.) 
 
 I Keep on bending until the hands which have 
 
 I been moving down the wall come to the ground. 
 
 f The pupil should at first only bend a short 
 "^ distance, and then return to the upright, gradually 
 bending farther as he gets more practice, until 
 finally he is able with ease to bend until his 
 
 \hands come to the ground. 
 
 Bringing the hands from the ground to the 
 wall, and moving them up, bring the body up, 
 the hands above the head and against the wall. 
 
 Spring from the hands and bring them down 
 to the sides, coming to the position of Attention. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 I See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 I 
 
 GROUP XIII. 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 See Preliminary Group. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Fase. 
 
 There are numerous variations and combinations of the 
 
 exercises in this group which any one having learned the 
 
 exercises here given, can, by a litth; ingenuity, easily find out 
 
 for himself. 
 
 I 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 121 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 / Bring the left leg across in front of the right, 
 «| the inside of the left knee being against the 
 ( outside of the right. 
 
 / Raise the fore-part of the feet, and keeping 
 J the body steady while turning on the heels, 
 j make a complete circle, the right shoulder 
 
 V leading. 
 ^ Bring the fore-part of the feet to the ground ; 
 
 Three. < the outside of the left knee will now be against 
 ' the inside of the right. 
 
 . Raise the fore-part of the feet, and keeping 
 j the body steady while turning on the heels, 
 \ make a complete circle, the left shoulder 
 
 V leading. 
 
 ( Bring the fore-part of the feet to the ground ; 
 < the pupil will now be in the same position as 
 ( he was in " One." 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the posi- 
 ( tion given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five.. 
 
 GJiange. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, only read " right " for " left " wherever it occurs, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 Eocfircise 3. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. < The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 t 1 
 
 t !l 
 
 < .|, 
 
 1-^ 
 
 i Tl 
 
 ! ^t 
 
1 
 
 
 t 
 
 122 
 
 PHYSICAL CtJLtURE. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three, 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Raise the heels, and keeping the body steady 
 while turning on the fore-part of the feet, make 
 a complete circle, the right shoulder leading. 
 
 Bring the heels to the ground ; the outside of 
 the left knee will now be against the inside of 
 the right. 
 ( The same as " Two," only the left shoulder is 
 ( leading. 
 
 \ Bring the heels to the ground. 
 
 < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3, only read " right " for " left " wherever it occurs, 
 and vice versa. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 / Spring straight up, commencing to bring the 
 I right shoulder around as the feet are leaving 
 
 < the ground, and describing a complete circle, 
 I alight on the fore-part of the feet, as nearly as 
 \^ possible in the place they occupied before. 
 
 At first, turning only three-quarters of the circle will be 
 practised. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 
 Exercise 5, except that the left shoulder will be brought 
 
 around as the feet are leaving the ground. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 One. 
 
 I See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 { 
 
 See S. 5, Squad Drill. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 128 
 
 lanner as 
 
 GROUP XIV. 
 
 Assemble. < See Group T. 
 
 i,nd at 
 Ease. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 < See Preliminary Group and Group VIII. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 Bear in mind that the left foot is the foot to start fr om. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group VIII. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1, Group VIII. 
 
 Instantly spring from the right foot on to 
 the hands, and the arms being straight, allow 
 the elbows to bend a little. 
 
 {The feet being carried up and pver, (the 
 knees kept straight and the body well curved) 
 as they are coming down spring from the 
 hands to the feet, coming up standing per- 
 fectly erect. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 Bear in mind that the right foot in to be the foot to start 
 
 fi 
 
 om. 
 
 This exercise is the same as Exercise 1, except read " right 
 foot " for " left foot," and vice vf.rsd. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. < The same as in Exercise 3, Group VIII. 
 
 I r 
 
 if 
 
 .ti 
 
?'o 
 
 124 
 
 Two. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUUK. 
 
 Instantly bringing the body and arms forward 
 ( and commencing to bend over, spring from both 
 (feet on to the hands, and the arms being 
 I straight, allow the elbows to bend a little. 
 
 Three. I The same as " Four," in Exercise 1. 
 
 \ 
 
 I See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 Disviiss. I See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 c>^^^J^^-5^. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 125 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 1 i 
 
 LIGHT DUMB-BELL SERIES OF EXERCISES.* 
 
 Assemble. < See Modes of Formation. 
 
 Position of "Attention." The dumb-bells being held in 
 the hands. 
 
 On the word " Salute," slowly depress the 
 chin and slightly bend the body, drawing back 
 the hijis, at the same time draw back the right 
 foot until the ball of the foot is behind and 
 about an inch from the heel of the left, the 
 ■weight of the body being principally on the 
 ' right leg, the feet flat on the ground, and the 
 knees straight throughout ; at the same time 
 bending the elbows, bring the dumb-bell in the 
 right hand up in front of and against the chest, 
 the upper part being against the front of the left 
 shoulder, the dumb-bell in the left hand being 
 brought up behind, and resting against the back. 
 
 / On the word " Attention," which should not 
 A Uention. <. be given until after a slight pause, come to that 
 ' position, but not too quickly. 
 
 ,\ 
 
 Salute. 
 
 in,: 
 IH 
 It 
 
 * Repeat each of the exercises 3, 4, 6, 8, 9 or 12 timeB before proceeding 
 to the next. They should first be learned separately ; afterwards they will 
 be executed in Quick time, except where otherwise specified, without any 
 pause between the numbers or exercises, commencing at the first exercise 
 and finishing at the last. At an entertainment this series of exercises 
 should be accompanied by music. 
 
 I Si. 
 
 It 
 
11 
 
 : 
 
 H 
 
 126 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Cut 20. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except the arms, which are kept 
 straight, raised, and brought to the front with the dumb-bells 
 together and in front of the neck and lower part of the face ; 
 back of the hands outwards. (See i, cut 20.) 
 
 Separate the dumb-bells smartly, keeping the 
 I arms straight and bringing them back on a line 
 ^ with the shoulders, but not with too much force. 
 ( {See 2, cut 20.) 
 
 / Keeping tho arms straight, bring the dumb- 
 < bells together in front of the neck and lower 
 i part of the face. {See i, cut 20.) 
 ( On the word '* Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change, 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 127 
 
 
 "i 
 
 4 
 
 w. 
 
 
 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 
 Position of •* Attention," except that the backs of the hands 
 are turned in ; thumbs to the rear. {See 1, cut 21.) 
 
 ( Keep the arms straight, and raise them side- 
 Owe. < ways from the shoulders, until the dumb-bells 
 i meet above the head, {See 2, cut 21.) 
 
 Separate the dumb bolls smartly, keep the 
 arras straight, and bring them down sideways, 
 until the backs of the hands touch the legs. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 1 
 
 ; j 
 
 MHHf 
 
 
 BK! ^ 
 
 i 
 
i 
 
 128 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 M; 
 
 ;:■ 
 
 It 
 
 « 
 
 Position of " Attention," except the arms, the left arm 
 being bent at the elbow and wrist, and raised until the dumb- 
 bell rests on the shoulder ; the right arm kept straight and 
 raised until in line with the shoulders, back of the hand down. 
 
 Straighten the left elbow and wrists, extend- 
 ing the arm in line with the shoulders, (the eyes 
 One. •( to follow the dumb-bell) at the same time bend- 
 ing the right elbow and wrist, bring the dumb- 
 bell in the right hand to the shoulder. 
 
 Straighten the right elbow and wrist, extend- 
 ing the arm in line with the shoulders, (the eyes 
 Two. <( to follow the dumb-bell) at the same time bend- 
 ing the left elbow and wrist, bring the dumb- 
 bell in the left hand to the shoulder. 
 
 Change. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 i'i 
 
 if 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the arms are bent at 
 the elbows and wrists, and raised until the dumb-bells rest on 
 the shoulders. 
 
 Straighten both arms at the elbows and wrists, 
 extending them in line with the shoulders. 
 
 Bend the arms at the elbows and wrists, and 
 ( bring the dumb-bells to the shoulders. 
 
 / On the word " Change," draw back the right 
 Change. foot, coming to the position given at the head 
 ' of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 ( 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 129 
 
 f \4 
 
 
 Cut U. 
 "Third Position," as explained in Exercise 6, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the right arm will be behind, and 
 the dumb-bell against the back ; the left arm hanging down 
 outside of, and in line with the left leg. 
 
 Bend over, letting the left arm go down, 
 until the dumb-bell touches the ground outside 
 of, and in line with the left foot. {See i, cut 
 22.) 
 
 Straighten the left knee and bend the right. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two, 
 
 Three. 
 
 5 
 
 ' bringing the body to the upright. {See 2^ cut 
 { 22.) 
 
 I Bend the left arm at the elbow, raising the 
 dumb-bell until it nearly touches the front part 
 ( of the shoulder. {See 3, cut 22.) 
 
 
; i 
 
 130 
 
 I 
 
 1^ 
 
 #^ 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Elevate the dumb-bell above the head to the 
 full extent of the arm. {See 4, cut 22.) 
 
 Bend the arm at the elbow, bringing the 
 dumb-bell down to the shoulder, rear part nearly 
 touching. {See 3, cut 22.) 
 
 Straighten the arm and drop it to the side. 
 {See 2, cut 22.) 
 
 Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 coming to the " Third Position " as before ex- 
 plained. 
 
 ^j I On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 1 
 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 *' Third Position," as explained in Exercise 6, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the left arm will be behind, and tho 
 dumb-bell against the back ; the right arm hanging down in 
 front of the right, and inside of the left leg. 
 
 ( Bend over, letting the right arm go down 
 / until the dumb-bell touches the ground inside of, 
 r and in line with the left foot 
 j Straighten the left knee and bend the right, 
 l bringing the body to the upright. 
 ( Bend the right arm at the elbow, raising the 
 Three. ^ dumb-bell until it nearly touches the frQut part 
 f of the shoulder. 
 
 J Elevate the dumb-bell above the head to the 
 \ full extent of the arm. 
 
 Y Bend the arm at the elbow, bringing the 
 '{ dumb-bell down to the shoulder, rear part nearly 
 ( touching. 
 
 -! Straighten the arm and drop it to the side. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 11; 
 
to the 
 
 ig the 
 nearly 
 
 le 
 
 side. 
 
 he left, 
 'ore ex- 
 position 
 
 i Series, 
 and the 
 down in 
 
 ro down 
 inside of, 
 
 le right, 
 
 ising the 
 ront part 
 
 id to the 
 
 iging the 
 irt nearly 
 
 le side. 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 131 
 
 Seven. 
 Change. 
 
 / Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 \ coming to the " Third Position/' as before ex- 
 ' plained. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 { 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 6, First Series, 
 (Calisthenics, except the arms, the left arm hanging down outside 
 of and in line with the left leg ; the right arm hanging down 
 in front of the right and inside of the left leg. 
 
 / Bend over, letting the arms go down until the 
 \ dumb-bells touch the ground, the left outside^ 
 \ and the right inside of, and in line with the left 
 
 V foot. 
 
 { Straighten the left knee and bend the right, 
 i bringing the body to the upright. 
 / Bend the arms at the elbows, raising the 
 
 Three. I dumb-bells, until they nearly touch the front 
 ' part of the shoulders. 
 
 { Elevate the dumb-bells above the head to the 
 ( full extent of the arms. 
 
 { Bend the arms at the elbows, bringing the 
 I dumb-bells down to the shoulders. 
 I Straighten the arms and drop them to the 
 1 sides. 
 
 / Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 I coming to the " Third Position," as before ex- 
 ' plained. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," bring the right foot 
 I forward, coming to the position given at the 
 
 V heftd of the nejft exercise, 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Change. 
 
132 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 >9fl 
 
 f 
 
 fli 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 3, First Series, 
 Calistlienics, except the arms, the left arm hanging down in 
 front of the left and inside of the right leg; the right arm 
 
 being behind and the dumb-bell against the back. 
 
 ( Bend over, letting the left arm go down, until 
 
 <| the dumb-bell touches the ground, inside of and 
 
 I in line with the right foot. 
 
 / Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 
 I bringing the body to the upright. 
 
 Bend the left arm at the elbow, raising the 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Change. 
 
 <| dumb-bell until it nearly touches the front part 
 ' of the shoulder. 
 
 / Elevate the dumb-bell above the head to the 
 1 full extent of the arm. 
 
 / Bend the arm at the elbow, bringing the 
 < dumb-bell down to the shoulder, rear part 
 ' nearly touching. 
 
 Straighten the arm and drop it to the side. 
 
 / Straighten the left knee and bend the right, 
 ■', coming to the " Third Position," as before ex- 
 ( plained. 
 
 / On the word " Change," come to the position 
 1 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 3, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the left arm will be behind, and the 
 dumb-bell against the back ; the right arm hanging down 
 outside of, and in line with the right leg. 
 
 / Bend over, letting the right arm go down 
 One. <^ until the dumb-bell touches the ground^ outside 
 ( o]P, and in line with the right foot. 
 
• 'V.fi 
 
 I 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 133 
 
 Series, 
 wn in 
 it arm 
 
 (I, until 
 of and 
 
 he left, 
 
 ing the 
 3nt part 
 
 1 to the 
 
 ging the 
 ear part 
 
 e side. 
 
 he right, 
 efore ex- 
 position 
 
 st Series, 
 and the 
 ng down 
 
 go down 
 d, outside 
 
 Twu. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 Six, 
 
 Seven. 
 Change. 
 
 Straighten the right knee and bend the left. 
 
 Bend the right arm at the elbow, raising tlie 
 dumb-bell until it nearly touches the front part 
 of the shoulder. 
 
 Elevate the dumb-bell above the head, to the 
 full extent of the arm. 
 
 Bend the arm at the elbow, bringing the 
 dumb-bell down to the shoulder, rear part nearly 
 touching. 
 
 Straighten the arm and drop it to the side. 
 
 Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 coming to the " Third Position," as before ex- 
 plained. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 3, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except the arms, the right arm hanging down out- 
 side of, and in line with the right leg ; the left arm hanging 
 down in front of the left and inside of the right leg. 
 
 / Bend over, letting the arms go down until the 
 ) dumb-bells touch the ground, the left inside and 
 j the right outside of, and in line with the right 
 ^ foot. 
 
 ( Straighten the right knee and bend the left, 
 ( bringing the body to the upright. 
 ( Bend the arms at the elbows, raising the 
 ] dumb-bells until they touch the front part 
 f of the shoulders. 
 
 ( Elevate the dumb-bells above the head to the 
 ( full extent of the arms. 
 
 One. 
 
 Tioo. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 fiiu' 
 
 I pit '* 
 
134 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 Change. 
 
 ( Bend the arms at tlio elbows, bringing the 
 i dumb-bells down to the shoulders. 
 
 ( Straighten the arms and drop them to the 
 ( sides. 
 
 Straigliten the left knee and bend the right, 
 coming to the " Third Position " as before ex- 
 plained. 
 
 On the word " Change," draw back the right 
 foot, coming to the position given at the head 
 of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the dumb-bell in the 
 left hand is elevated over the head ; thumb to the front. 
 
 Keeping the left arm straight, bring it down 
 to the left until it comes to the side, thumb to 
 
 itho front, at the same time keeping the right 
 arm straight, raise it to the right, until the 
 dumb-bell is over the head, thumb to the front) 
 and bend the body to the left. 
 
 (Keeping the right arm straight bring it down 
 to the right until it comes tc the side, thumb to 
 the front, at the same time keeping the left arm 
 straight, raise it to the left, until the dumb-bell 
 is over the head, thumb to the front, and bend 
 the body to the right. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. J 
 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 135 
 
 Exercise 1 2. 
 
 Cut 23. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four 
 
 i Raise the arms from the elbows to the front, 
 a little higher than the waist ; thumbs up. {See 
 ( 2, cut 23.) 
 
 I Straighten the arms, extending them to the 
 i front, backs of the hands down. (See 3, cut 23.) 
 
 I Bend the elbows and bring the arms back to 
 1 position as in " One." {See 2, cut 23.) 
 
 i Straighten the arms, elevating the damb-bells 
 ^ over the head, backs of the hands out. {See 4, 
 f ciU 23.) 
 
 llBi 
 
M 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 11 
 
 '■' ! 
 
 13G 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Change. 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 { 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Change. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 The same as " Three." 
 
 The same as "Two." 
 
 The same as " Three." 
 
 ^ Drop the arms to the sides. (See i, cut 23.) 
 
 j On the word " Change " come to the position 
 ) given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 13. . 
 
 * Attention." 
 
 Bend the knees and lower the body, keeping 
 it nearly perpendicular until the dumb-bells 
 touch the ground, outside of, and in line with 
 the feet ; feet flat on the ground. 
 I Straighten the knees and raise the body to the 
 ) erect position. 
 
 Bend the arms at the elbows, raising the 
 \ dumb-bells until they touch the front part of the 
 ( shoulders. 
 
 j Elevate the dumb-bells above the head to the 
 I full extent of the arms. 
 
 r Bend the arms at the elbows, bringing the 
 I dumb-bells down to the shoulders. 
 ( Straighten the arms, dropping them to the 
 ( sides. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 i 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 Position of '* Attention." 
 
 i Swing the dumb-bells upwards to the front, and 
 
 Oyie. 
 
 ) 
 
 bending the elbows, allow them to pass above 
 / the head and behind the shoulders. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 137 
 
 1^ Straighten the arms at the elbows and swing 
 Two. them down, allowing the dumb-bells to pass the 
 
 I legs to the rear as far as they will go. 
 
 The body must be ke[)t steady and erect throughout the 
 exercise. 
 
 Clan i ^'^ *^^ word " Change," spring smartly to the 
 
 I position given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise. 15. 
 
 VI 
 
 the 
 the 
 the 
 sition 
 
 Cut 94. 
 
 Position. — The legs are apart, about from 16 to 24 inches 
 (according to size of pupil), the knees straight, the heels in line; 
 the right arm behind the back, back of the hand in, and the 
 dumb-bell resting against the back ; left arm bent at the elbow 
 and raised at the shoulder ; the dumb-bell over and behind the 
 
? i! 
 
 I 
 
 A 
 
 I! ,* 
 
 I 
 
 PI 
 
 138 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 slioiildor, and the body bent slightly to the rear. {See J, 
 
 cut 24.) 
 
 Straighten the lef*i elbow, and bending over, 
 swing the dumb bell in the left hand down be- 
 tween the legs, keeping the knees straight. 
 (See 2, cut ^^^.) 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 ( Swing the dumb-bell up, bringing it and the 
 -' body back to the " Position," as above described. 
 I (See 1, cvi 2 4. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 "* 9^' I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 Position. — The legs are apart, about from 16 to 24 inches, 
 (accordingto the size of the pupil,) the knees straight, the heels in 
 line; the left arm behind the back, back of the hand in, and the 
 dumb-bell resting against the back ; right arm bent at the elbow 
 and raised at the shoulder ; the dumb-bell over and behind the 
 shoulder, and the body bent slightly to the rear. 
 
 1^ Straighten the right elbow and bending over, 
 -^ swing the dumb-bell in the right hand down 
 I between the legs, keeping the knees straight. 
 
 i Swing the dumb-bell up, bringing it and the 
 ( body back to the " Position " as above described 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Position. 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 -The same as in Exercise 1 6. 
 
 Straighten the right elbow and bending over, 
 swing the dumb-bell in the right hand down be- 
 tween (ht* legs, keeping the knees straight. 
 
 J 
 
* » 
 
 QYMNASTICS. 
 
 139 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 J 
 
 I Bringing the body up and bending slightly to 
 the rear swing the dumb-bell in the right hand 
 around the right leg and bending the elbow, 
 bring it up behind and against the back, back 
 of the hand in ; at the same time bringing the 
 left arm and dumb-bell from behind the back, 
 bend the elbow and raise the dumb-bell over and 
 
 \ behind the shoulder. 
 
 i Straighten the left elbow, and bending over 
 ' swing the dumb-bell in the left hand down be- 
 ( tween the legs, keeping the knees straight. 
 
 ^ Bringing the body up and bending slightly 
 to the rear, swing the dumb-bell in the left hand 
 around the left leg and bending the elbow, 
 bring it up behind and against the back, back 
 of the hand in ', at the same time bringing the 
 right arm and dumb-bell from behind the back, 
 bend the elbow and raise the dumb-bell over and 
 
 I behind the shoulder. 
 
 / On the word " Change," spring smartly to 
 Change. \ the position given at the head of the next exer- 
 
 <' 
 
 cise. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the arms, keeping 
 them straight, are raised in line with the shoulders, backs of the 
 hands up, thumbs to the front. 
 
 One. \ Turn t^he arms over, backs of the hands down. 
 
 Two, 
 
 I 
 
 Turn the arms over, backs of the hands up. 
 
 - j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 \i 
 
 
140 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the dumb-bells are 
 elevated above the head, arms straight, and the backs of the 
 hands to the front. 
 
 One. \ Turn the arms, backs of the hands to the rear. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Turn the arms, backs of the hands to the front. 
 
 pj j On the word *' Change," come to the position 
 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are extended 
 in front, level with the shoulders, backs of the hands down. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 J Turn the arms over, backs of the hands up. 
 ■< Turn the p.rms over, backs of the hands down. 
 
 { 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are bent at the 
 elbows, fore-arms straight to the front, backs of the hands down. 
 I Turn the dumb-bells over, backs of the hands 
 1 up. 
 
 I Turn the dumb-bells over, backs of the hands 
 ( down. 
 
 [ On the word " Change," come to the position 
 I given at «he head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the backs of the hands 
 are turned to the front. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 141 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Changf. 
 
 I 
 
 Turn the arms around, backs of the hands to 
 the rear. 
 
 ( Turn the arms around, backs of the hands to 
 ( the front. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 Cut 25. 
 
 Petition of " Attention," except that the arms are bent at 
 the elbows and raised from the shoulders, the dumb-bells being 
 al)Ove and behind the shoulders. {See 1, cut 25.) 
 
 Straighten the arms at the elbows and swing 
 them down, allowing the dumb-bells to pass the 
 legs to the rear as far as they will go, at the 
 
 
 
142 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 same time bend the knees and hips and lower 
 the body, keeping it nearly perpendicular ; the 
 dumb-bells just touching the ground in passing 
 the legs. {See 2, cut 25.) Then raise the body 
 by straightening the legs. 
 ( Swing the dumb-bells up, until they are above 
 \ and behind the shoulders. [See j?, cut 25.) 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 23. 
 
 Straighten the arms at the elbows and swing 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 ■^ them down, allowing the dumb-bells to pass to 
 ( the rear as far as they will go. 
 
 {Swing the dumb-bells up until they are above 
 and behind the shoulders, at the same time 
 bending the hips and knees, lower the body, 
 keeping it nearly perpendicular, and straight- 
 ening the legs, raise the body to the erect 
 position. 
 j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercises 23 and 24. 
 
 Straighten the arms at the elbows and swing 
 them down, allowing the dumb-bells to pass the 
 legs to the rear as far as they will go, at the 
 same time bend the knees and hips and lower 
 the body, keeping it nearly perpendicular, the 
 dumb-bells just touching the ground in passing 
 the legs, then raise the V>ody by straightening 
 the hgs. 
 
 One. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 14^ 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. I 
 
 {Swing fhe dumb-bells up until they are above 
 and behind the shoulders, at the same time 
 bendinw the hips and knees, lower the body, 
 keeping it nearly perpendicular, and straight- 
 ening the legs raise the body to the erect 
 position. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 Cut 26. 
 
 I'osition of " Attention," except that the left arm is bent at 
 the elbd^ fthd raiied from iKe shoulder over Ihe head ; back of 
 the hnnd Vo the reAr. 
 
 u 
 
I 
 
 m 
 
 :;■! 
 
 
 144 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 i 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 > bell in the left hand round the head from front 
 ' to rear. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 26. 
 
 Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 I bell in the left hand round the head from rear 
 (. to front. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the i)Osition 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 Position of *' Attention," except that the right arm is bent 
 at the elbow, and raised from the shoulder over the head ; back 
 of the hand to the rear. 
 
 / Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 < bell in the right hand round the head from front 
 ' to rear. 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 Position. — the same as in Exercise 28. 
 
 / Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 < bell in the right hand round the head from rear 
 ( to front. 
 
 I On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are bent at 
 the elbows and raised from the shoulders over the head ; right 
 hand in front and backs of the hands to the rear. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 145 
 
 .1 
 
 One, 
 
 Change. 
 
 Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 bells round the head from front to rear, com- 
 mencing with the left and following with the 
 ^right. 
 
 ^ On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ) given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 29, except that the left 
 hand is in front. 
 
 {Press the shoulders back and circle the dumb- 
 bells round the head from rear to front, com- 
 mencing with the right and following with the 
 left. 
 / On the word " Change," draw back the right 
 Chanye. J foot, coming to the position given at the head of 
 { the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 6, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the body is bent over the left leg, and 
 the dumb-bell that was in the right hand is placed on the 
 ground inside of and touching the left foot, the other dumb- 
 bell being in the left hand ; the arms hanging down, the left 
 outside and the right inside of and to the rear of the left leg. 
 ( Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, behind 
 ( the left leg, to the right hand. 
 i Bring the left arm outside of, and the right 
 \ arm inside of the left leg, round to the front. 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, in 
 front of the left leg, to the left hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm outside of, and the right 
 
 0716. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Th 
 
 ee. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 { 
 
 (arm inside of the left leg, round to the rear. 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
T 
 
 , 
 
 U 
 
 146 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 32. 
 
 / Bring the left arm round outside of, and the 
 One. right arm inside of the left leg, round to the 
 
 ' front. 
 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, in 
 
 front of the left leg, to the right hand. 
 
 ( Bring the left arm round outside, and the 
 
 j right arm round inside of the left leg, to the rear. 
 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, in rear 
 
 of the left leg, to the left hand. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercises 32 and 33, except that 
 the right knee is bent and the left straight, the body bending 
 over the right leg and the arms hanging down, the left inside 
 and the right outside of, and to the rear of the right leg. 
 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, behind 
 the right leg, to the right hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm round inside, and the right 
 arm round outside, to the front of the right leg. 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, in 
 front of the right leg, to the left hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm round inside, and the right 
 
 arm around outside, to the rear of the right leg. 
 
 ( On the word "Change," come to the position 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 { 
 I 
 I 
 { 
 
 Change. 
 
 Position.— 
 One. 
 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 -The same as in Exercise 34. 
 
 r Bring the left arm around inside, and the 
 -^ right arm around outside, to the front of the 
 I right leg. 
 
Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 CJvfinge. 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 147 
 
 f Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, in 
 ( front of the right leg, to the right hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm around inside, and the 
 
 right arm around outside, to the rear of the 
 
 right leg. 
 
 f Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, 
 \ behind the right leg, to the left hand. 
 f On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 ■^ 
 
 Out n. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 6, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the body is turned to the lialf-right, 
 and bent over ; the dumb-bell that was in the right hand being 
 on the ground inside of and touching the left foot, the other 
 dumb-bell being in the left- hand ; the arms hanging down, the 
 left ittside of the left leg, and the right outside of the right 
 leg. {See 1, cut 27.) 
 
 ( Bring the left arm round to the outside of 
 One, < the left leg, and the right arm round to the 
 
 ' inside of the right leg. {See 2^ cut 27.) 
 
 \ \ 
 ■■:. 1 
 
 i: i 
 
 
 If 
 
 it 
 
 n 
 
148 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Change, 
 
 Straightening the left leg and bending the 
 right, pass the dumb-bell behind the left leg, 
 from the left hand to the right hand. 
 
 Turn the body to the right, bringing the left 
 aim around to the inside of the left leg, and the 
 right arm around to the outside of the right leg. 
 {See, 3, cut 27.) 
 
 Straightening the right leg and bending the 
 left, pass the dumb-bell behind the right leg, 
 from the righ*^ hand to the left. 
 
 On the word *' Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 Position.- — The sanio as in Exercise 3G, except that the body 
 is turned to the right. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 ( Straightening the left leg and bending the 
 ^ right, pass the dumb-bell behind the right leg, 
 ' from the left hand to the right. 
 
 / Turning the body to the half-right, bring the 
 I left arm around to the outside of the left leg, 
 j and the right arm around to the inside of the 
 ' right leg. 
 
 j Straightening the right leg and bending the 
 '■ left, pass the dumb-bell behind the left leg, from 
 
 ' the right hand to the left. 
 
 ^ Turning the body to the right, bring the left 
 -| arm around to the inside of the left leg, and the 
 
 [ right arm around to the outside of the right leg. 
 
 / On the word " Change," bring the right foot 
 J up to the left, then draw back the left foot and 
 
 j come to the position given at the head of the 
 
 ^ next exercise. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 140 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 3, First Series, 
 Calisthenics, except that the body is bent over the right leg, 
 and one dumb-bell is on the ground inside of the right foot, 
 the other dumb-bell being in the left hand ; the arnjs hanging 
 down, the left inside and the right outside of and to the rear 
 of the right leg. 
 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, behind 
 the right leg, to the right hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm inside of, and the right 
 
 arm outside of the right leg, round to the front. 
 
 Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, in 
 
 front of the right leg, to the left hand. 
 
 Bring the left arm inside of, and the right arm 
 outside of the right leg, round to the rear. 
 
 Oiie. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 { 
 
 j On the word *' Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. . 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 38. 
 
 ( Bring the left arm inside of, and the right 
 
 I arm outside of the right leg, round to the front. 
 
 I Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, in 
 
 ( front of the right leg, to the right hand. 
 
 j Bring the left arm inside of, and the right arm 
 
 ( outside of the right leg, round to the rear. 
 
 j Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, 
 
 I behind the right leg, to the left hand. 
 
 j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercises 38 and 39, except that 
 the left knee is bent and the right straight, the body bending 
 
nIT 
 
 150 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 II 
 
 over the left leg, and the arms hanging down, the left outside 
 of, and to the rear, and the right inside of, and to the rear of 
 the left leg. 
 
 I Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, b(!- 
 J hind the left leg, to the right hand. 
 
 ( Bring the left arm round outside, and the 
 y right arm round inside to the front of the left 
 (leg. 
 
 ( Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, in 
 \ front of the left leg, to the left hand. 
 
 r Bring the left arm round outside, and the 
 < right arm round inside to the rear of the left 
 (leg. 
 
 j On tl e word " Change," come to the position 
 I given at the head of the next 3verci8e. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four, 
 
 Change. 
 
 ll 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 40. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 I Bring the left arm round outside, and the 
 ^ right arm, round inside to the front of the left 
 (leg. 
 
 j Pass the dumb-bell from the left hand, in 
 ) front of the left leg, to the right hand. 
 
 I Bring the left arm round outside and the 
 J right arm, round inside to the rear of the left 
 
 (log- 
 
 ) Pass the dumb-bell from the right hand, be- 
 i hind the left leg, to the left hand. 
 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 151 
 
 b outside 
 le rear of 
 
 aand, bo- 
 
 and the 
 : the left 
 
 hand, in 
 
 and the 
 : the left 
 
 e position 
 
 and the 
 fthe left 
 
 hand, in 
 
 C hinge. 
 
 \ On the word " Change," oomc to the position 
 I given at the hcnd of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 " Third Position," as explained in Exercise 3, First Series 
 Calisthenics, except that the body is turned to the half left, and 
 bent over ; the dumb-bell that was in the right hand, being on 
 the ground inside of, and touching the right foot, the other 
 (lunib-bell being in the right hand ; the arms hanging down, the 
 left outside of the left leg, and the right inside of the right leg. 
 / Bring the left arm round to the inside of the 
 < left leg, and the right arm round to the outside 
 ' of the right leg. 
 
 t Straightening the right leg and bending the 
 ' left, pass the dumb-bell behind the right leg, 
 I from the right hand to the left. 
 
 Turn the body to the left, bringing the left 
 arm round to the outside of the left leg, and 
 the right arm, round to the inside of the right 
 leg. 
 
 i Straightening the left leg and bending the 
 .' right, pass the dumb-bell behind the left leg, 
 I from the left hand to the right. 
 ( On the word *' Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Th-ie. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Cliange. 
 
 and the 
 bf the left 
 
 hand, be- 
 
 Exercjse 43. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 42, except that the body 
 is turned to the left. 
 
 r Straightening the right leg and bending the 
 One. \ left, pass the dumb-bell behind the left leg, 
 C from the right hand to the left. 
 
152 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 U 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 f Turn the body to the half-l(;ft bringing the 
 I left arm round to the inside of the left leg, and 
 
 \the right arm round to the outside of the right 
 leg. 
 i Straightening the left leg and bending the 
 ) right, pass the dumb-bell behind the right leg. 
 i Turn the ])ody to the left, bringing the left 
 -' arm round to the outside of the left leg, and the 
 I right arm round to the inside of the right leg. 
 . On the word " Change," taking up the other 
 ) dumb-bell and bringing up the left foot to the 
 \ right, come to the position given at the head of 
 ' the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 Cut 28. 
 
 Position of '' Attention," except that the back of the left 
 hand is turned to the front. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 15.^ 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 ( Hwing the 
 \ high as it will 
 
 left arm out to tlu; loft, and up as 
 go ; back of the hand to the front. 
 ( {See 1, cut 28.) 
 
 [ Swing it down, letting it bend at the elbow 
 ( and pass behind the back. {See 2, cut 28.) 
 I On the word *' Change," come to the position 
 { given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 Position of " Attention," except that the back of the right 
 hand is turned to the front. 
 
 ( Swing the right arm out to the right, and up as 
 ( high as it will go ; back of the hand to the front. 
 ( Swing it down, letting it bend at the ell^ow, 
 ( and pass behind the back. 
 I On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 Position of " Attention," except that the backs of the hands 
 are turned to the front, and the left arm elevated to the left. 
 
 Swing the left arm down, bending the elbow, 
 let it pass behind the back, and at the same 
 time swing the right arm out to the right, and 
 up as high as it will go. 
 
 Swing the right arm down, bending the elbow, 
 let it pass behind the back, and at the same 
 time swing the left arm out to the left, and up 
 as high as it will 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 go. 
 
 Change. 
 
 On the word " Change 
 
 &^> 
 
 come 
 given at the head of the next exercise 
 
 to the position 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 Position of *' Attention," except that the right arm is 
 bent at the elbow, and behind the back, the dumb-bell being 
 against the back. 
 

 1 
 
 154 
 
 One. 
 Change.. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 I Keeping the left arm straight, swing it round 
 ( in a circle from front to rear, 
 j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise. 48. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 47. 
 
 One. 
 Change. 
 
 ( Keeping the left arm straight, swing it round 
 ( in a circle from rear to front. 
 I On the word " Change," come to the position 
 \ given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the left arm is l»ent 
 at the elbow, and behind the back, the dumb-bell being against 
 the back. 
 
 ( Keeping the right arm straight, swing it 
 ^^" ( round in a circle from front to rear. 
 ^i j On the word " Change," come to tlie position 
 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Position. - 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 -The same as in Exercise 49. 
 
 Keeping the right arm straight, swing it 
 
 { 
 
 round in a circle from rear to front. 
 
 ^j j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 G iiange. ■( . ^ % ■% p % . 
 
 ( given at the head or the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms and dumb- 
 bells are elevated above the head. 
 
 j Keeping the left arm straight, swing it down, 
 
 One. 
 
 \ and round in a circle from front to rear. 
 
I' 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 155 
 
 ig it round 
 le position 
 
 ig it round 
 he position 
 
 •m is bent 
 ing against 
 
 b, swing it 
 
 lie position 
 
 B. 
 
 ,, swing it 
 
 Jie position 
 e. 
 
 and dumb- 
 ing it down, 
 lear. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 ( 
 
 Keeping the right arm straight, swing it down 
 and round in a circle from front to rear, com- 
 mencing at the moment the left arm is passing 
 the leg. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 51. 
 
 « 
 
 I Keeping the left arm straight, swing it down, 
 
 I and round in a circle from rear to front. 
 
 / Keeping the right arm straight, swing it down, 
 
 ) and round in a circle from rear to front, com- 
 
 \ mencing at the moment the left arm is passing 
 
 ' the leg. 
 
 j On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms and dumb- 
 bells are elevated above the head ; backs of the hands to the 
 
 rear. 
 
 Keeping the knees and arms straight, bend 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 ) the body and swing the dz^mb-bells down, allow- 
 
 \ ing them to pass the legs to the rear as far as 
 
 ^ they will go. 
 
 ( Raising the body up, swing the dumb-bells 
 
 ( up, bringing them above the head. 
 
 f On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are bent at 
 the elbows and wrists : the dumb-bells underneath and touch- 
 ing the arm-pits. 
 
 11 
 
 \ II 
 
i 
 
 156 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Attention. 
 
 Class 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Right- - 
 Tarn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Straightening the elbows and wrists, swing 
 the dumb-bells outwards and upwards as high 
 as they will go, without turning the hands; at 
 the same time rising and sinking on the toes. 
 
 Swing the dumb-bells down and inwards, 
 bending the elbows and wrists, bring them under- 
 neath and touching the arm-pits ; at the same 
 time rising and sinking on the toes. 
 
 On the word ** Change," dropping the arms to 
 the sides, come to the position of " Attention." 
 
 As explained in the beginning of the series. 
 As explained in the beginning of the series. 
 See Mode of Formation. 
 As above. 
 
 The class will turn to the right. 
 See Modes of Formation. 
 
 'I 
 
 iftiiil 
 
 ■■ft. 
 a |1 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 157 
 
 sts, swing 
 is as high 
 hands; at 
 I the toes. 
 I inwards, 
 tiem under- 
 t the same 
 
 ;he arms to 
 \.ttention." 
 
 the series. 
 the series. 
 
 STATIONARY ROPE SERIES OP 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The pupils should never be permitted to climb with the legs 
 or feet and hands ; no gymnast worthy of the name would 
 condescend to practise climbing in that manner, nor is there 
 any need to do so, as the pupil will find that if he has 
 thoroughly practised the exercises in the Gj'oups up to Group 
 X, he will be able to climb by the true gymnastic method of 
 the hands only. 
 
 The exercise in each Group of this series should be thoroughly 
 learned "ore proceeding to the next. 
 
 Pupils under eight should not be required to practise any of 
 the exercises of this Group. 
 
 TECHNICAL TERMS. 
 
 Group I. — Springing and pulling up on the single rope ; 
 .springing and bringing the inside of the feet against the rope. 
 
 Group II. — Springing and pulling up on two ropes ; spring- 
 ing and bringing the instep of the feet against the ropes ; 
 springing and turning through. 
 
 Group III. — Swinging ; swinging and bringing the insteps 
 against the ropes ; swinging and turning through. 
 
 Group jy. — Pujling up on single rope ; bringing the feet 
 up, 
 
158 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Group V. — Straight pull up on two ropes -, Birds Nest ; Skin 
 the Cat. 
 
 Group VI. — Jumping to the rope or ropes. 
 
 Group VII. — Straight pull up — legs at a right angle. 
 Group VIII. — Pulling up and shifting the hands. 
 Group IX. — Pulling up and shifting the hands — the legs at 
 a right angle. 
 
 Group X. — Climbing the single rope — the legs hanging 
 straight down — and the legs at a right angle. 
 
 Group XI. — Climbing two ropes — the legs hanging straight 
 down — and the legs at a right angle. 
 
 Group XII. — Climbing two ropes by jumps— the legs hang- 
 ing down — and the legs at a right angle. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 I 
 
 GROUP I. 
 
 For the formation of the class, See S. 24, 
 S(iuad Drill. 
 
 The pupil (or pupils) after finishing the exercise will retire 
 to his (or their) place by moving on in front of the class and 
 wheeling about, he (or they) will move on in rear of the class 
 until opposite his (or their) place, he (or they) will turn, step 
 up to his (or their) place, halt, and stand at ease. 
 
 The class when in line will be facing the ropes. 
 
 ^^^TLT^ I ^^® ^^' ^' ^ ^' ^"^^^^ ^"^^• 
 
 The pupils will take this position in the class, until being 
 required to practise an exercise, when they will immediately 
 assume the position of Attention, step up to their places in 
 front of the rope, and come to the position given at the head of 
 the exercise, 
 
Skin 
 
 legs at 
 
 langing 
 straight 
 
 5s hang- 
 
 S. 24, 
 
 ill retire 
 
 ass and 
 
 bhe class 
 
 irn, step 
 
 til being 
 
 Mediately 
 
 places in 
 
 He hea4 of 
 
 GYMNASTICS, 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 159 
 
 Cut 29. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are raised, 
 with the elbows slightly bent above the head, and the hands 
 grasp the rope, the left underneath the right above and nearly 
 touching the left ; thumbs on the opposite side of the rope to 
 the fingers: the rope hanging down outside of the right leg. 
 
 < Straightening the arms and bending the knees. 
 One. I lower the body until the weight of it is prin- 
 
 ( cipally on the arras. 
 
 
 
' ill 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ; 
 
 ili'i 
 
 IGO 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 i Straightening the legs and bending the arms, 
 < spring up as high as possible without changing 
 ' the grasp. 
 
 r Slowly lower the body until the feet are on 
 1 the ground. 
 
 This exercise should be repeated three or four times before 
 the word "Next," is given. 
 
 On the word " Next," the pupil (or pupils) 
 having finished the exercise, will proceed as al 
 -^ ready described, while the next in order will 
 come to Attention, step up and assume the posi- 
 \^tion given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Next. 
 
 1: 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except read 'left' 
 where * right ' occurs and vice versd. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 i 
 
 / Straightening the legs and bending the arms, 
 
 J spring and throw the legs up, bringing the inside 
 
 j of the right foot against the rope, above the 
 
 hands. 
 j Bring the feet as slowly as possible to the 
 1 ground. 
 
 j The same as " One." 
 
 / Straightening the legs and bending the arms 
 J spring and throw the legs up bringing the in- 
 \ side of the left foot against the rope, above the 
 ^ hands. 
 
 }'- 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 161 
 
 anus, 
 .nging 
 
 ire on 
 before 
 
 pupils) 
 i as al 
 er will 
 le posi- 
 
 1 'left' 
 ,nner as 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Nine. 
 Next. 
 
 { 
 
 The same as " Three." 
 The same as " One." 
 
 /■ Straightening the legs and bending the arms, 
 spring and throw the legs up, catching the 
 ' rope between the hollow of the feet. 
 
 \ 
 
 The same as "Three." 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 ^^ifrrT I ^®® ^' ^' ^^^^^ ^"^^• 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 le arms, 
 le inside 
 ove the 
 
 e to the 
 
 the arms 
 g the in- 
 bove the 
 
 Stand at 
 -Ease 
 
 GROUP II. 
 
 Assemble. < See Grroup I. 
 \ See Group I. 
 
 Exercise 1. « 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group I, except that 
 the left hand grasps a rope on the left and the right hand 
 another on the right, both hands being at the same elevation, 
 and the ropes hanging outside the legs. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
162 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 ] 
 
 Cut SO. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Next. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 . Straightening the legs and bending the arms, 
 I spring and throw the legs up, bringing the in- 
 \ step of the right foot against the rope, held by 
 V the right hand. 
 
 f Curve the body, bringing it between the ropes 
 I as far as possible. 
 
 f Bring the body to position as in " Two," and 
 ( slowly bring the feet to the ground. 
 
 ■! See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
'4 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 163 
 
 the artn«, 
 the in- 
 held by 
 
 the ropes 
 
 Vo," and 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 2, except that the 
 instep of the left foot will bo brought against the rope held by 
 the left hand. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 This exercise will be the same as Exercise 2, except that the 
 insteps of both feet will be brought against the ropes. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 Seven. 
 Eight. 
 Nine. 
 
 Ten. 
 Eleven. 
 Twelve. 
 
 Next. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 1. 
 ■! The same as in Exercise 2. 
 
 < The same as in Exercise 2. 
 ' The same as in Exercise 2. 
 I The same as " One." 
 
 < The same as " Two, ' in Exercise 3. 
 
 i The same as " Three," in Exercise 3. 
 
 < The same as " Four," in Exercise 3. 
 I The same as " One." 
 
 •J The same as " Two," in Exercise 4. 
 
 -] The same as " Three," in Exercise 4. 
 
 I 
 
 The 
 
 See 
 
 (( 
 
 same 
 
 Exercise 1, Group I 
 
 Four," in Exercise 4. 
 
164 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 Cut SI. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except that the ropes 
 will be held by the hands, they being only as high as the 
 shoulders. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 (Straightening the legs and bending the arms, 
 spring and bring the feet up, and over, and 
 passing between the ropes to the rear, down to 
 the ground. 
 
 Three. 
 
 The same as " One." 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 1G5 
 
 Four. 
 
 Next. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 {Straightening the legs and bending the arms 
 spring and bring the body up, over, passing 
 between the ropes, to the front and down, and 
 bring the feet to the ground, coming to the 
 position given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 I See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 { See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 the ropes 
 t\\ as the 
 
 Ithe arms, 
 lover, and 
 down to 
 
 
 
 GROUP III. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 { 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 tand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 1 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group II., except that 
 standing on the toes, the arms are elevated to their full extent 
 wb.en the hands grasp the ropes. 
 
 / Bring the feet from the ground to the front, 
 drawing the knees up. 
 
 Straighten the knees, throwing the feet out to 
 the front, and the body curving, swing them to 
 the rear. 
 
 Let them return, swinging to the front and 
 drawing the knees up. 
 
 Straightening the knees and throwing the 
 feet out to the front, repeat the exercise three 
 \or four times. 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group L 
 
 One. 
 
 wo. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 < 
 
 Next. 
 
 
 ■:l| 
 
I 
 
 
 166 
 
 Position. - 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 Next. 
 
 Position. - 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 
 Next. 
 
 Position.- 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 Next. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 -The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1 . 
 
 I Bring the instep of the right foot against the 
 I rope held by the right hand. 
 
 < The same as " Three," in Exercise 2, Group II. 
 •j The same as " Four," in Exercise 2, Group II. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 -The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Bring the instep of the left foot against the 
 rope held by the left hand. 
 
 The same as " Three," in Exercise 3, Group II. 
 
 The same as " Four," in Exercise 3, Group II. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 -The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 < Bring the insteps of both feet against the rope. 
 -! The same as "Three," in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 < The same as *• Four," in Exercise 4, Group II. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 167 
 
 Position. 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Next. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 -The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 -j " One," " Two " and " Three," of Exorcise 1. 
 
 Bring the instep of the right foot against the 
 rope held by the right hand, and curving the 
 body, bring it between the ropes as far as 
 possible. 
 
 Bring the body down, and straightening the 
 knees, throw the feet out to the front, and the 
 body curving, swing them to the rear. 
 
 Let them return swinging to the front, and 
 drawing the knees up, bring the instep of the 
 left foot against the rope held by the left hand, 
 and curving the body, bring it between the 
 ropes as far as possible. 
 
 The same as " Three." 
 
 The same as " Four," except that the insteps of 
 both feet will be brought against the ropes. 
 
 Bring the feet down to the ground, drop the 
 hands to the sides, coming to the position of 
 Attention and retire as alreadj^ described. 
 
 { 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. I " One," " Two " and " Three," of Exercise 1. 
 
 ^ ( Bring the body up and over, passing between 
 
 Two. J the ropes, and let the feet come down as far as 
 f possible. 
 
 
■:^ii 
 
 168 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUHE. 
 
 iPfii'Hn ' 
 
 i 
 
 ri 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Next. 
 
 I Raise the hips and drawing up the knees 
 
 ) bring the body up'and over, passing between the 
 
 y ropes, and bringing the feet down to the ground. 
 
 I Drop the hands to the sides, coining to the 
 < position of Attention and retire as already 
 / described. 
 
 \ See Exercise t, Group I. 
 Right -Turn, i See S. 4, Squac Drill. 
 Dismiss. \ See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP IV. 
 
 Assemble. < See Group I. 
 
 Stand at — ( c^ /-. x 
 
 Base. \ ^^^ ^"^"P ^- 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group I., except that 
 standing on the toes the arms are elevated to their full extent 
 when the ha,nds grasp the rope. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Thr> 
 
 Lift the toes from the ground. 
 
 Bending f' "^ elbows, without any assistance 
 from the le^.. r feet, pull the body up until the 
 chin is above ^l^^e hands ; the heels must be kept 
 together and the legs straight. 
 
 / Straightening the elbows allow the body to 
 <' sink to the full extent of the arms; the feet are 
 I not to touch the ground. 
 
Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 { 
 
 { 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 The same as "Two." 
 
 169 
 
 The same as " Three," except that the feet will 
 be brought to the ground and the arms dropped 
 to the sides, the pupil coming to the position of 
 Attention and retiring as already described. 
 
 Next. -j See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 "Two" and "Three," should be repeated three or four times 
 in succession, ir quick time. 
 
 - Exerr.ie 2. 
 
 Pcisition. — The same as in E-vorcise 1, except that the right 
 hand will be underneath a id the left above; the rope hanging 
 down outside of the left lef> 
 
 This exercise will be performed in th°- same manner as Exer- 
 cise 1. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 / Pull up to half-arm, and smartly throwing 
 < the head back and the knees up, bring the inside 
 
 ' of the right foot against the rope. 
 
 / Bring the feet slowly to the ground, and 
 J dropping the arms to the sides, come to the 
 
 \ position of Attention, and retire as before 
 
 ^ described. 
 
 On 
 
 Two. 
 
 Next. \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise i. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 3, except that the mside of the left foot will be 
 brougiit against the ropo. 
 
 i\ 
 

 i 
 
 ■'I! 
 
 170 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. \ The same as " One," in Exercise 3. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, bring the feet down, 
 but not touching the ground. 
 
 Pull up to half-arms, and quickly throwing 
 the head back and the knees up, bring the inside 
 of the left foot against the rope. 
 
 I The same as " Two." 
 
 / Pull up to half-arms, and quickly throwing 
 ■I the head back and the knees up, catch the rope 
 I between the hollow of both feet. 
 
 Bring the feet down to the ground, dropping 
 the arms to the sides, and coming to the position 
 of Attention, retire as before described. 
 
 N'ext. < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2. 
 
 This exercise will be perfor ned in the same manner as 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Dismiss. < SeeS. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assf nhle 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 ■ { 
 
 { 
 
 GROUP V. 
 
 See Group I. 
 See Group T. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 171 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position, — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 One. 
 
 i 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 Five. 
 
 Next. 
 
 The same as "One," in Exercise 1, Group IV. 
 
 Bending the elbows, without any assistance 
 \ from the legs or feet, quickly pull the body up 
 J as high as possible ; the heels must be kept 
 ^ together and the legs straight. 
 
 ( 
 
 1 
 
 The same as "Three," Exercise 1, Group IV. 
 
 The same as "Two." 
 
 The same as " Five," Exercise 1, Group IV. 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 "Two" and " Three" should be repeated three or four times 
 in succesdon, in quick time. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position. — The uamc as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Without any assistance from the feet, pull 
 
 up to half-arms, and smartly throwing the head 
 
 back and the knees up, bring the instep of the 
 
 right foot against the rope held by the right 
 
 hand, and curve the body, bringing it between 
 
 the ropes as far as possible. 
 
 / Let the body return between the ropes, 
 
 j slowly bring the feet to the ground, and drop- 
 
 j ping the arms to the sides, come to the position 
 
 ' of Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
 ■| See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Onj 
 
 Two. 
 
 Next. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 
m 
 
 .,: 
 
 172 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 2, except that the instep of the left foot will be 
 brought against the rope held by the left hand. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 2, except that the instep of both feet will be brought 
 against the ropes. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Without any assistance from the feet, pull up 
 to half-arms, and smartly bring the feet and 
 knees up, turning over through the ropes and 
 down as far as possible, but not touching the 
 ground. 
 
 {. Slowly bring the hips, knees and feet up, and 
 turning through the ropes, bring the feet down 
 to the ground, and dropping the arms to the 
 sides, come to the position of Attention, and 
 retire as before described. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Next. 
 
 I lie 
 
 I; 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 f 
 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 anci 
 
 P]x 
 
 rop 
 
 GROUP VI. 
 
 Assemble. \ See Group I. 
 
 Stand at — \ a f-A r 
 
 „ { See Group 1. 
 
 Ease. \ ^ 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position of " Attention." — The pupil standing close in front 
 and a little to the right of the rope. 
 
T^ 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 173 
 
 One. 
 
 / 
 
 Two. 
 
 Next. 
 
 [ Quickly bending the knees and then straight- 
 ening them, spring up as high as possible, 
 throwing the arms up, and catch the lope with 
 the right hand above and left underneath ; as 
 the hands catch the rope, immediately pull up 
 to half-arms ; the heels will be kept together, 
 and the rope hang down outside the right 
 
 {Bring the right hand below the left, then 
 straightening the elbows bring the feet to the 
 ground, and bringing the arms to the sides, come 
 to the position of Attention, and retire as 
 before described. 
 
 1 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group 1. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position of "Attention." — The pupil standing close in front 
 and a little to the left of the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, only read "left" for "right," and vice versd. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of "Attention." — The pupil standing clo-e to the 
 ropes, each rope being at ua equal distance from him. 
 
 / Quickly bending the knees and then straight- 
 ening them, spring up as high as possible, 
 throwing the arms up and catching the rope on 
 the right with the light hand, and the rope 
 One. \ on the left with the left hand, the h^nds being 
 on the same level ; as the hands catch the ropes 
 immediately pull up to half-arms ; the heels 
 will be together and the r'" js hang down 
 
 V 
 
 outside the legs. 
 

 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 174 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Let go the rope in the left hand and catch 
 it again about twelve inches lower down. 
 
 Let go the rope in the right hand and 
 catch it again about twenty-four inches lower 
 down, bring the feet to the ground and the 
 arms to the sides, coming to the position of 
 Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of ''Attention." — The pupil standing a short 
 distance from, (the distance to be gradually increased as he 
 becomes more proficient) and a little to the right of the rope. 
 / Quickly bending the knees and then straight- 
 ening them, spring upward and forward, 
 throwing the arms up and forward, and calch 
 the rope with the right hand above and the 
 left hand underneath ; as the hands catch the 
 rope, immediately pull up to half -arms; the 
 body will be curved and allowed to swing past 
 the rope to the front and return beside the rope, 
 the heels kept together and the rope hanging 
 \down outside the right leg. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 < 
 
 Two. 
 
 { 
 
 Next. \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Bxerdae 5. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — The pupil standing a short 
 distance from, (the distance being gradually in msed as he 
 becomes more proficient) and a little to the left ot he rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same man^'er as 
 Exercise 4, only read " left " for " right," and vice versd. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 175 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 One. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — The pupil standing a short 
 distance (the distance to be gradually increased as he becomes 
 more proficient) from the ropes, each rope being at an equal 
 distance from him. 
 
 Quickly bending the knees and then straight- 
 ening them, spring upward and forward, 
 throwing the arms up and forward and catch 
 the rope on the right with the right hand, and 
 the rope on the left with the left hand, the hands 
 ^ being on the same level ; as the hands catch the 
 ropes, immediately pull up to half-arms ; the 
 body will be curved and allowed to swing 
 between the ropes to the front and return 
 between the ropes ; the heels together, and the 
 ropes hanging down outside the legs. 
 
 Let go the rope in the right hand and catch 
 again about 12 inches lower down. 
 
 Let go the rope in the left hand and catch 
 
 it again about 24 inches lower down, bring the 
 
 Three. -=f feet to the ground and the arms to the sides, 
 
 coming to the position of Attention, and retire 
 
 as before described. 
 
 Two. 
 
 U 
 
 Next. j See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 7, 
 
 Position of " Attention." — The pupil standing close in front 
 arid a little to the left of the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in ths same manner as 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 i 
 
176 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 I! 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 Position of " Attontion." — The pupil standing close in front 
 and a little to the right of the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 Position of "Attention." — The pupil standing a short 
 distance from, (the distance to be gradually increased as he 
 becomes more proficient) and a little to the left of the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 Position of ** Attention." — The pupil standing a short 
 distance from, (the distance to be gradually increased as he 
 becomes more proficient) and a little to the right of the rope. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Position.- 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Exercise 11, 
 
 -The same as in Exercise 6. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 6, except that the 
 body will be curved and allowed to swing 
 between the ropes to the front, and throwing 
 the knees up bring the insteps of the feet against 
 the ropes, and curving the body pass it between 
 the ropes. 
 
 ( Let the body return between the ropes and 
 ( bring the feet down. 
 
 (Let go both ropes, catching them again 
 about 12 inches lower down, drop to the ground, 
 bring the arms to the sides, coming to the posi- 
 tion of Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
front 
 
 Next. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dis 
 
 smiss. 
 
 { 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 See Exercise 1, (J roup T. 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 Sees. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP VTl 
 
 Assemble. A See Group I. 
 
 Stand at — 
 
 Ease. 
 
 i at — ( C3 i-t T 
 
 .g < See Group T. 
 
 177 
 
 ^i' !,■ 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Cut S2. 
 
i 
 
 li 
 
 
 
 
 178 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 r Keeping the knees and arms straight, slowly 
 
 ( raise the feet to the front until the legs are at 
 
 ' a right angle with the body ; heels together. 
 
 ( Keeping the knees and arms straight, let the 
 
 I feet come slowly down, but not touch the ground. 
 
 ■j The same as " One." 
 
 {Keeping the knees and arms straight let the 
 feet come slowly down to the ground, drop the 
 arms to the sides, coming to the position of 
 Attention, and retire as already described. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Next. < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Next. 
 
 { 
 
 / Keeping the knees straight and the legs at 
 I a right angle, bend the elbows, pulling the body 
 ( up as high as possible ; heels kept together. 
 Straightening the elbows, lower the body to 
 the full extent of the arms ; the knees will be 
 kept straight, the legs at a right angle, and the 
 heels together. 
 
 \ The same as " Two." 
 
 I The same as "Three." 
 
 ■I The same as " Four," in Exercise 1. 
 
 -j See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 
 ■^■^■i^-.^^-^^^.-.: ,->■,.■■■ 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 179 
 
 Eictrcise 3. 
 Position.— The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Next, 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss, 
 
 /" Keeping the knees and arms straight, slowly 
 I raise the feet to the front, up, passing between 
 j tlie ropes over to the rear, and down as far as 
 ^possible; heels kept together. 
 
 i Keeping the knees and arms straight, slowly 
 / raise the hips and bring them up, over and down 
 ( to the front until the legs are at a right angle. 
 
 The same as "Four," in Exercise 1. 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 I 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 { 
 
 GROUP VIII. 
 
 See Group I. 
 See Group I. 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 '. \ 
 
 III 
 
 ] 
 
 til 
 
 
 III 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 C<. 
 
 
 % 
 
 Q., 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 sua iM 
 
 ^- IM mm 
 
 12.0 
 
 IM 
 
 III 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.4 
 
 .8 
 
 1.6 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 W "7. 
 
 e. 
 
 
 0% >': 
 
 
 >(SS 
 
 O 
 
 / 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 s. 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^<b 
 
 .V 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 
 f^N 
 
Of 
 
 y m. 
 
 Cp- 
 
 Q.r 
 
mmf 
 
 \ 
 
 Xk' 
 
 180 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Cut 33. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1 , Group IV. 
 
 / Without any assistance from the feet or legs, 
 pull the body up smartly until having passed 
 the half-arms, quickly let go with the left hand, 
 One -l ^^^ ^^^ right arm still continuing to pull, catch 
 
 the rope again about 12 inches above the right 
 hand ; the knees kept straight, the heels together 
 . and the rope hanging down outside the right leg. 
 
n 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 181 
 
 or legs, 
 passed 
 eft hand, 
 ull, catch 
 the right 
 
 together 
 right leg. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Mext. 
 
 t Slowly lowering the body let go with the left 
 < hand and bring it quickly down, catching the 
 I rope about 12 inches below the right hand. 
 / Bring the feet to the ground and drop the 
 J arms to the sides, coming to the position of 
 ' Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2, Group IV. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 j Exercise 1, only read "right" for "left" and vice versa. The 
 [rope hanging down outside the left leg. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except that the rope 
 [will hang down outside the left leg. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 [Exercise 1, the rope hanging down outside the left leg. 
 
 Exercise 4. . 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2, except that the rope 
 I will hang down outside the righ^ leg. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 [Exercise 2, the rope hanginjr down outside the right leg. 
 
 Position. 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 -The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 / Without any assistance from the feet or legs, 
 pull the body up smartly until having passed tho 
 half -arm, loosen the grasp of the left hand, and 
 the right arm still continuing to pull, slide the 
 left hand quickly up the rope and grasp it again 
 12 inches, more or less, higher than the right 
 hand; the knees kept straight, the heels together, 
 
 \ and the ropes hanging down outside the legs. 
 
182 
 
 Wl 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Next. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUKE. 
 
 / Slowly lowering the body let go with the left 
 J ha ' and slide it quickly down the rope, and 
 \ grabp it again about 12 inches lower than the 
 ^ right hand. 
 
 I The same as " One." 
 
 The same as " Two," except that the feet will 
 be brought to the ground and the arms dropped 
 to the sides, coming to the position of Attention, 
 and retiring as before described. 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 5. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner 
 
 Exercise 5, only read " right " for " left " and vice verad. 
 %tr^ { See S. 4, Squad Drill, 
 Dismiss. < See S. 51, Squad Drill 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 GROUP IX. 
 
 Assemble. < See Group I. 
 < See Group I. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group IV. 
 
 / Keeping the knees and arms straight, raise thel 
 One. < feet to the front until the legs are at a right] 
 ' angle with the body ; heels together. 
 
with the left 
 tie rope, and 
 \rev than the 
 
 the feet will 
 irms dropped 
 jf Attention, 
 
 B manner 
 versd. 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 183 
 
 Two. 
 
 Tk 
 
 fl'^e. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Next. 
 
 ( The same as " One," in Exercise 1, Group 
 < VIII., except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ( with the body. 
 
 ( The same as "Two," in Exercise 1, Group 
 N VIII., except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ( with the body. 
 
 / The same as "Three," in Exercise 1, Group 
 I VIII. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2, Group IV. 
 
 i The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 j The same as " One," in Exercise 2, Group 
 -; VIII., except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ( with the body. 
 
 / The same as " Two," in Exercise 2, Group 
 ^ VIII. except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ' with the body. 
 
 f The same as " Three," in Exercise 2, Group 
 i VIII. 
 
 I See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except that the rope 
 will hang down outside the left leg. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1, the rope hanging down to the left of the body. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2, except that the rope 
 will hang down outside the right leg. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 Next. 
 
 Ji 
 
 i^ 
 
l''l|!l 
 
 lm\ 
 
 
 184 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner, as 
 Exercise 2, the rope hanging down to the right of the body. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 Oiie. < The same as in Exercise 1. 
 
 The same as " One," in Exercise 5, Group 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 Four. 
 
 < VIII., except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ' with the body. 
 
 / The same as " Two," in Exercise 5, Group 
 VIII., except that the legs are at a right angle 
 ( with the body. 
 
 f 
 
 The same as "Two." 
 
 The same as " Three," except that the feet 
 
 Five. 
 
 Next 
 
 ] will be brought to the ground, the arms dropped 
 \ to the sides, coming to the position of Attention, 
 ^ and retiring as before described. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 5. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 5, only read '* right " for " left " and vice versd. 
 
 ^^Tut^ { ^^^ ^' ^' ^"1"^^ ^"^^• 
 Dismiss. < See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Earn. 
 
 GROUP X. 
 
 See Group I. 
 
 < See Group I. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 185 
 
 Exercise. 1. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Gronp IV. 
 
 One. < The same as in Exercise 1, Group VIII. 
 
 m j The same as " One," in Exercise 2, Group 
 
 I wo. I VIII. 
 
 Repeat " One " and " Two," until the pupil arrives at the 
 top of the rope or until he commences to feel tired, when he 
 must not try to go higher, but keep his remaining strength to 
 descend with, in the following manner. 
 
 I Slowly lowering the body let go with the 
 J uppermost hand and bring it quickly down, 
 I catching the rope twelve inches more or less be- 
 low the other hand. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 I 
 
 The same as "Three." 
 
 Repeat " Three " and " Four," until the feet come to the 
 ground, then drop the arms to the sides, come to the position 
 of Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
 Next, < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 The pupil must not attempt to slide down the rope, as he 
 would be very liable to tear his hands, perhaps to the bone, but 
 if he should by chance miss his grasp, he should direct all his 
 energies to attain a new one. If however he has become pro- 
 ficient in the preceding exercises in this series, keeps his eyes 
 directed to the point he intends to place his hands, and begins 
 to descend before he gets tired out, there is not the slightest 
 chance of his missing his grasp, or slipping. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except that the rope 
 will hang down outside the left leg. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1. 
 
3 1 
 
 186 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, except that the legs 
 will be at a right angle with the body. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise L 
 
 Exerdae 4. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 2, except that the legs 
 will be at a right angle with the body. 
 
 This exercise will be performed in the same manner as 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at — 
 Ease. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 GROUP XL 
 
 See Group I. 
 See Group I. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 5, Group VIII. 
 
 The same as " One," in Exercise 6, Group 
 VIII. 
 
 Repeat "One" and "Two," until the pupil arrives at the top 
 of the rope, or until he commences to feel tired, when he must 
 not try to go higher, but commence to descend in the following 
 manner. 
 
lat the legs 
 
 manner as 
 
 lat the legs 
 
 manner as 
 
 VIII. 
 
 6, Group 
 
 8 at the top 
 m he must 
 3 following 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 Ife 
 
 Three. 
 
 Slowly lowering the body, let go with the 
 uppermost hand and bring it quickly down the 
 rope, and grasp it again about twelve inches 
 lower than the other hand. 
 
 Four. < The same as *' Three." 
 
 Repeat "Three" and "Four" until the feet come to the 
 ground, then drop the arms to the sides, coming to the position 
 of Attention, and retire as before described. 
 
 Next. < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 5, Group IX. 
 
 Two. I The same as in Exercise 5. Group IX. 
 
 Three. I The same as " Two," in Exercise 6, Group IX. 
 
 Repeat " Two" and " Three," until the pupil arrives at the top 
 of the rope, or until he commences to feel tired, when he must 
 not try to go higher, but descend in the following manner. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1 ; the legs kept at 
 right angle to the body. 
 
 Five. i The same as " Four." 
 
 Repeat "Four" and "Five" until near the ground, then bring 
 the feet to the ground, drop the arms t3 the sides, coming to 
 the position of Attention, and retire a& before described. 
 
 Four. 
 
 u 
 
 Next. < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 Dismiss. | See S. 51, Squad Prill, 
 
 I 
 
ihs 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 GROUP XII. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Stand at— 
 Ease. 
 
 i 
 
 See Group I. 
 See Group I. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 (Pull the body up smartly and as the arms are 
 passing the half-arms, spring from the hands, 
 sliding them quickly up the ropes and grasping 
 the ropes again 12 inches, more or less, higher; 
 the legs kept straight and hanging down between 
 the ropes. 
 
 j Lower the body to nearly full arms. 
 
 I The same as " One." 
 
 Repeat " Two " and "Three" until the pupil arrives at the top 
 of the rope, or until he commences to feel tired, when he must 
 not try to go higher, but descend in the following manner. 
 
 , Pull the body up smartly, and as the armc are 
 I passing the half -arms, loosen the grasp, and slid- 
 \ ing the hands down the rope grasp it again about 
 V 6 or 8 inches lower down. 
 
 < Lower the body to nearly full arms. 
 
 \ The same as "Four." 
 
 Repeat " Five " and ** Six " until the feet come to the ground, 
 then drop the arms to the sides, coming to the position of 
 Attention, and retire as already described. 
 
 Next. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 I 
 
 See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 
(iYMNASTICS. 
 
 bhe arms are 
 I the hands, 
 nd grasping 
 less, higher; 
 )wn between 
 
 as. 
 
 Bs at the top 
 len he must 
 aanner. 
 
 ;he armc are 
 3p, and slid- 
 again about 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 1, Group III. 
 
 One. } The same as in Exercise 1, Group IX. 
 
 Two. i The same as " One," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Three. i The same as " Two," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Four. 
 
 I 
 
 J The same as " One," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Repeat "Three and " Four," until the pupil arrivesat the top 
 of the rope, or until he commences to feel tired, when he must 
 not try to go higher, but descend in the following manner. 
 
 Five. \ The same as "Four," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Six 
 Seven. 
 
 The same as " Five," in Exercise 1. 
 The same as "Six," in Exercise 1. 
 
 Repeat " Six " and "Seven," until near the ground, then bring 
 the feet to the ground, drop the arms to the sides, comin to 
 the position of Attention, and retire as befoi c* described. 
 
 Next. < See Exercise 1, Group I. 
 Dismiss. i See S. 51, Squad Drill. 
 
 I' 
 
 lai^ 
 
 9H$ 
 
 i 
 
 the ground, 
 position of 
 
?8<8 
 
 ) 6 
 
 s. 
 
PART II. 
 
 ^"'m 
 
 
 FOR GIRLS. 
 
 1 i 
 
 Hlf : > 
 
 DRILL. 
 
 Dpfinitions. — See Part I. 
 
 General Rules. — See Part I. 
 
 Class or Squad Drill. — See Part I. 
 
 The drill will be the same as in Part I, omitting s. 6, s, 33, 
 Nos. 3 and 4 of s. 41, No. 2 of s. 43, s. 44, s. 45, s. 46, s. 47, 
 s. 48, s. 49, and s. 50. • 
 
 8~ «r 
 
 • vj " » "* U- 
 
 m. 
 
 Ts—l 
 
 (191) 
 
192 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 
 FIRST SERIES OP EXERCISES. 
 
 Assemble. I See Modes of Formation, Part T. 
 
 SaluU 
 
 Cut 34. 
 
 ( On the word "Salute," slowly depress the 
 the chin and slightly bend the body, drawing 
 back the hips, and at the same time draw back 
 the right foot until the ball of the foot is behind 
 and about an inch from the heel of the left, the 
 weight of the body being principally on the right 
 foot ; the feet flat on the ground and the knees 
 
 I kept straight. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 193 
 
 On the word « Attention," which should not 
 Attention, j be given until after a slightpause, come to that 
 position, but not too quickly. 
 
 For the exorcises in this 
 Part I. 
 
 series see First Series, Calisthenics, 
 
 SECOND SERIES OP EXERCISES. 
 
 Assemble. | See Second Series, Calisthenics, Part I. 
 
 Salute. I See First Series. 
 Attention. \ See First Series. 
 
 For the exercises in this series see Second Series, Calisthenics 
 Part I. ' 
 
 THIRD SERIES OP EXERCISES* 
 
 Assemble. -5 
 
 Salute. < 
 
 Attention. < 
 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 See First Series. 
 See First Series. 
 
 * See note page 125. 
 
I' 
 
 J .. 
 
 I 
 
 194 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Cut 35. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 i 
 
 Olose the hands and raise them smartly as 
 high as the shoulders, backs to the rear, and the 
 elbows kept close to the sides. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, elevate the arms to 
 the full extent above the head. 
 

 CALISTHEiNiCe 
 
 i 
 
 195 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four, 
 Change. 
 
 I Bending the elbows, bring the hands down 
 < level with the shoulders, backs to the rear, and 
 (^ the elbows close to the sides. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, drrp the arms to 
 the position ot Attention. 
 
 On the word "Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 { 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 ( Close the hands and raise them to the front, 
 ( backs down, and the elbows close to the sides. 
 Straightening the elbows, extend the arms to 
 the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Change. 
 
 { 
 
 { Bend the elbows bringing them back close to 
 1 the sides, hands to the front. 
 ( Straightening the elbows drop the arms to the 
 ( position of Attention. , 
 
 \ See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 nartly as 
 , and the 
 
 ! arms to 
 
 Three. 
 
 t Bending the elbows and wrists bring the 
 ( fingers to the shoulders, shoulders pressed back. 
 
 (Straightening the elbows, elevate the left arm 
 above the head, thumb to the rear, and drop the 
 rignt to the side, thumb to the front ; eyes 
 looking kit the left hand. 
 
 i Bending the elbows and wrists, bring the 
 J fingers of the left hand down, and those of the 
 I right up, to the shoulders, 
 
 if 
 
 ■ H 
 
 ■ i] 
 
Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 Change. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Straightening the eltows, elevate the right 
 arm above the head, thumb to the rear, and 
 drop the left to the side, thumb to the front; 
 eyes looking at the right hand. 
 
 Bending the elbows and wrists, bring the 
 fingers of the right hand down, and those of the 
 left hard up, to the shoulders. 
 
 Straightening the elbows elevate both arms 
 above the head. 
 
 Bending the elbows and wrists, bring the 
 fingers of both hands to the shoulders. 
 
 Straightening the elbows, bring the arms to 
 the position of Attention. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 Position of " iVttention." 
 
 Three. 
 
 The same as *'One," Exercise 3. 
 
 Straightening the elb^ «vs, extend the left arm 
 to the left, thumb to the rear, and drop the right 
 arm to the side, thumb to the front. 
 
 < The sai ae as " Three," Exercise 3. 
 
 Y Straightening the elbows extend the right arm 
 ^ to the right, thumb to the rear, and drop the 
 I left arm to the side, thumb to the front. 
 
 / The same as " Five," Exercise 3. 
 
 r Straightening the elbows, extend the left arm 
 ( to the left and the right arm to the right. 
 
 < The same as " Seven," Exercise 3. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 197 
 
 Eight. I The same as "Eight," Exercise 3. 
 Change. < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 Caution. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 -Slow Time. 
 
 I Bring the hands at the full extent of the 
 <^ arms to the front, close to the body, knuckles 
 i inwards, till the fingers meet at the points. 
 
 {Letting them touch the clothes and pass close 
 to the face, raise them over the head, the ends 
 of the fingers still touching and pointing down- 
 wards so as to touch the head, thumbs pointing 
 to the rear, elbows pressed back, shoulders kept 
 down. 
 
 Throw the hands up, extending the arms 
 smartly upwards, palms of the hands inwards. 
 
 Force them obliquely back and gradually let 
 them fall to the position of Attention, elevating 
 the chest as much as possible. 
 
 Raise the arms outwards from the sides with- 
 out bending the elbows, pressing the shoulders 
 back, until the hands meet above the head, 
 palms to the front, fingers pointing upwards, 
 thumbs locked, left thumb in front. 
 
 j Bend over until the hands touch the feet, 
 I keeping the arms and knees straight. 
 
 Keep the thumbs locked and bring the body 
 to the erect position, keeping the arms straight 
 and raising them over the head. 
 
 
 
[til 
 
 
 SI, 
 V: 
 
 1^ 
 
 198 
 
 Hight. 
 
 Change. 
 
 f 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Separate the hands, forcing the arms obliquely 
 back until they are extended in a line with the 
 I shoulders, and allow them to fall gradually from 
 l^thence to the original position of Attention. 
 
 <! See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 6. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the hands are raised 
 in front, at the full extent of the arms and in line with the 
 mouth, palms together, thumbs close to the fore-fingers. 
 
 i Separate the hands smartly, throwing them 
 One. < well back, slanting downwards; at the same 
 I time raise the body on the fore-part of the feet. 
 
 Keeping the arms straight bring the hands in 
 front, at the full extent of the arms and in line 
 
 Two. 
 
 I with the mouth ; palms meeting and the heels 
 Incoming to the ground. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 Position of Attention. 
 
 (Keeping the arms straight, close the hands 
 and raise them in front of and in line with the 
 mouth, thumbs upwards and the fingers 
 touching. 
 
 ( Separate the hands smartly, throwing the 
 Two. \ arms back in line with the shoulders, backs of 
 I the hands downwards. 
 
 J Swing the arras round from front to rear as 
 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 ) many times as required. 
 
 ( Stop, with 
 ( shoulders, 
 
 the arras in line with the 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 m 
 
 rear as 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 Change. 
 
 i Keeping the arms straight, bring the hands in 
 - front of, and in line with the mouth, thumbs 
 (^ upwards and the fingers touching. 
 
 Come to the position of Attention. 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 Position of " Attention," except that the left arm is bent 
 at the elbow and raised from the shoulder over the head ; back 
 of the hand to the rear. 
 
 j Press the shoulders back and circle the left 
 ( hand round the head from rear to front. 
 
 Chctnge. < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the right arm is bent 
 at the elbow and raised from the shoulder over the head ; 
 back of the hand to the rear. 
 
 ( Press the shoulders back and circle the right 
 \ hand round the head from rear to front. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are bent 
 at the elbows and raised from the shoulders over the head ; 
 left hand in front and the backs of the hands to the rear. 
 
 ( Pk'ess the shoulders back and circle the hands 
 One. < round the head, from rear to front, commencing 
 (^with the left hand, followed by the right. 
 
 Change. I See Exercise 1. 
 
 I 
 
I t 
 
 200 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the arms are raised 
 in line with the shoulders, backs of the hands down, and the 
 hands open. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 I Turn the arms over, backs of the hands up, 
 ( closing the hands at the same time. 
 
 j Turn the arms, backs of the hands down, 
 ( opening the hands at the same time. 
 
 I 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the arms are raised 
 from the elbows, the hands closed and against the chest, backs 
 to the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Four. 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 Change. 
 
 ( Extend the left arm to the front, left shoulder 
 
 < turning to the front, back of the hand down, 
 I and the head inclining to the left. 
 
 j Bring back the left hand to the chest, and the 
 ( shoulders square to the front. 
 
 ( Extend the right arm to the front, right 
 J shoulder turning to the front, back of the hand 
 f down, and the head inclining to the right. 
 
 r Bring ba ^k the right hand to the chest and 
 ( the shoulders square to the front. 
 
 ( Extend both arms to the front, shoulders 
 
 < square to the front, backs of the hands down and 
 I the head erect. 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 Bring back both hands to the chest. 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 
are raised 
 n, and the 
 
 hands up, 
 ads down, 
 
 are raised 
 Lest, backs 
 
 't shoulder 
 nd down, 
 
 }t, and the 
 
 ont, right 
 i the hand 
 Lght. 
 
 chest and 
 
 shoulders 
 down and 
 
 CALISTHENICS. 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 201 
 
 Cut S6. 
 
 Position of "Attention," except that the arms are raised 
 from the elbows and brought together, the hands closed, backs 
 to the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 (Separate the arms smartly, bringing them 
 back in line with the shoulders; shoulders 
 pressed back, fore-arms upright and the backs of 
 the hands to the rear ; at the same time rise on 
 the toes. 
 
 I Bring the arms together in front and the 
 ' heels to the ground. 
 
 { 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 
202 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 Cut J7. 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 / Step to the front with the left foot, the left 
 knee perpendicular to the instep, the right knee 
 straight and firm, feet flat upon the ground ; the 
 body upright, shoulders square to the right, left 
 arm elevated from the shoulder, bending at the 
 elbow and wrist, back of the hand up, and the 
 points of the fingers nearly touching the head, 
 chin slightly elevated, the eyes looking upwards 
 and to the front; and the right hand behind the 
 
 Vright leg. 
 
 One. 
 
 { 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 203 
 
 Tv30. J 
 
 Change. 
 
 ( Step to the rear with the left foot, the left 
 knee perpendicular to the instep, the right knee 
 straight and firm, feet flat upon the ground ; the 
 body upright, shoulders square to the left, right 
 arm elevated from the shoulder, bending at the 
 elbow and wrist, back of the hand up, and the 
 points of the fingers nearly touching the head, 
 chin slightly elevated, the eyes looking upwards 
 and to the front; and the left hand behind the 
 
 Vleft leg. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 One. 
 
 { 
 
 the left 
 right knee 
 ound; the 
 right, left 
 ing at the 
 
 and the 
 the head, 
 
 upwards 
 )ehind the 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 / Step to the front with the right foot, the right 
 knee perpendicular to the instep, the left knee 
 straight and firm, feet flat upon the ground; the 
 body upright, shoulders square to the left, right 
 arm elevated from the shoulder, bending at the 
 elbow and wrist, back of the hand up, and the 
 point of the finijers nearly touching t/ie head, 
 chin slightly elevated, the eyes looking upwards 
 and to the front ; and the left hand behind the 
 left leg. 
 
 / Step to the rear with the right foot, the right 
 knee perpendicular to the instep, the left knee 
 straight and firm, feet flat upon the ground ; the 
 •body upright, shoulders square to the right, left 
 arm elevated from the shoulder, bending at the 
 elbow and wrist, back of the hand up, and the 
 points of the fingers nearly touching the head, 
 chin slightly elevated, the eyes looking upwards 
 and to the front; and the right hand behind the 
 
 \ right leg. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Two. < 
 
 Change. 
 
 i 
 
 It 
 
204 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 '• 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 {Bring the right hand under the right shoulder, 
 thumb to the front; the left arm elevated from 
 the shoulder and bending at the elbow and 
 wrist, back of the hand up, and the point of 
 the fingers nearly touching the head ; the \)ody 
 bending to the right. 
 
 Bring the left hand under the left shoulder, 
 thumb to the front; the right arm elevated from 
 the shoulder and bending at the elbow and 
 wrist, back of the hand up, and the point of 
 the fingers nearly touching the head ; the body 
 ^bending to the left. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 Two. 
 
 OtUS8, 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 205 
 
 shoulder, 
 ited from 
 bow and 
 point of 
 the body 
 
 shoulder, 
 ited from 
 bow and 
 point of 
 the body 
 
 
 Position of '• Attention." 
 
 ( Step to the front with the left foot, as in 
 One. -^Exercise 14; backs of the hands together as 
 I high as the waist. 
 
 Step to the rear with the left foot, as in 
 Exercise 14 ; at the same time bring the hands 
 up, letting them touch the clothes and pass 
 Two. < close to the face, until they are elevated over 
 the head, then press the shoulders back and 
 separate the hands, bringing the arms obliquely 
 back and letting them fall to the sides. 
 
 CJiange. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 I Step to the front with the right foot, as in 
 One. < Exercise 15 ; the rest will be the same as in 
 (^Exercise 17. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 \ Step to the rear with the right foot, as in 
 ^ Exercise 15; the rest will be the same as in 
 (Exercise 17. 
 i See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 5, First Series, except 
 that the left foot is raised about four inches from the ground, 
 and the weight of the body is on the right leg. . 
 Caution. — Without advancing. 
 
 Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left and hop once on the fore-part of the left 
 foot, swinging the right foot to the rear, the sole 
 about four inches from the ground ; the right 
 foot pointing to the right, and the left pointing 
 . to the front. 
 
 One. 
 

 :^ 
 
 *:£': 
 
 mt 
 
 
 MV|| 
 
 ' 
 
 II 
 
 
 •II 
 
 ;! 
 
 
 
 206 Physical culture. 
 
 /■ Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 I the right and hop once on the fore-part of the 
 J, J right foot, swinging the left to the front, the 
 
 *, ^ sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 I right foot pointing to the right, and the left 
 V^pointing to the front. 
 
 < See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 2, First Series^ except 
 thab the right foot is raised about four inches from the ground, 
 the weight of the body being on the left leg. 
 
 Caution. — Without advancing. 
 
 ^ Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 I the right and hop once on the fore-part of the 
 J right foot, swinging the left foot to the rear, 
 I the sole about four in^ches from the ground ; the 
 I left foot pointing to the left and the right 
 \^pointing to the front. 
 
 z' Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 
 I the left and hop once on the fore-part of the 
 
 left foot, swinging the right foot to the front, 
 
 the sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 
 leit foot pointing to the left and the right 
 
 ^pointing to the front. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 Position. — " One " of the " First Position," as in Exercise 4, 
 First Series, except that the left foot is about twelve inches to 
 the left of the right foot, and raised about four inches from the 
 ground. 
 
CALISTHENICS, 
 
 207 
 
 Oaution.- 
 
 )re-part of 
 tart of the 
 front, the 
 jund ; the 
 the left 
 
 es^ except 
 le ground, 
 
 )re-part of 
 art of the 
 the rear, 
 }und ; the 
 the right 
 
 3re-part of 
 Eirt of the 
 the front, 
 ound ; the 
 the right 
 
 Ixercise 4, 
 I inches to 
 t from the 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Without closing. 
 
 Spring from the right foot to the fore- part of 
 the left and hop once on the fore-part of the left 
 foot, swinging the right foot out to the right, 
 the sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 feet pointing in the same direction as they were 
 at the start. 
 
 Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 the right and hep once on the fore-part of the 
 right foot, swinging the left foot out to the left, 
 \ the sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 I feet pointing in the same direction as they were 
 V^at the start. 
 
 Change. 
 
 { 
 
 See Exercise 1, 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 One. 
 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 5, First Series, except 
 that the left foot is raised about four inches from the ground. 
 Caution. — Advancing. 
 
 ^ Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left, and hop once on the fore-part of the left 
 , foot, advancing about three inches and swinging 
 ^ the right foot to the rear, the sole about four 
 I inches from the ground ; the right foot pointing 
 Vthe right and the left pointing to the front. 
 
 ' Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 the right, bringing the right down in the place 
 just vacated by the left, and hop once on the 
 fore-part of the right foot, advancing about three 
 inches, swinging the left foot to the front, the 
 sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 right foot pointing to the right and the left 
 
 .pointing to the front. 
 
 Two. \ 
 
 s 
 
One. 
 
 208 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Chcmge. \ See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 Position. — The same as in Exercise 21. 
 
 Caution. — Left close. 
 
 {Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left and hop once on the fore-part of the left, 
 closing about three inches and swinging the right 
 foot out to the right, the sole about four inches 
 from the ground ; the feet pointing in the same 
 direction as they were at the start. 
 / Spring from the left foot to the fore-part 
 of the right, bringing the right down in the 
 place just vacated by the left, and hop once on 
 the fore-part of the right foot, closing about three 
 inches, swinging the left foot out to the left, the 
 sole about four inches from the ground ; the feet 
 pointing in the same direction as they were at 
 the start. 
 
 Two. 
 
 I 
 
 V 
 
 Change, 
 
 { 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 24- 
 
 Position. — "One " of the " First Position," as in Exercise 1, 
 First Series, except that the right foot is about twelve inches 
 to the 1 ght of the left foot, and raised about four inches from 
 the ground. 
 
 Caution. — Right close. 
 
 {Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 the right, and hop once on the fore-part of the 
 right, closing about three inches, and swinging 
 the Ibit foot out to the left, the sole about four 
 inches from the ground ; the feet pointing in 
 the same direction as they were at the start. 
 
 One. 
 
CALISTHiiNICS. 
 
 209 
 
 e-part of 
 the left, 
 the right 
 ir inches 
 :he same 
 
 Eore-part 
 
 1 in the 
 once on 
 
 )ut three 
 left, the 
 the feet 
 
 ' were at 
 
 ercise 1, 
 e inches 
 es from 
 
 -part of 
 t of the 
 R^inging 
 ut four 
 iting in 
 tart. 
 
 Two. 
 
 I Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left, bringing the left down in the place 
 just vacated by the right, and hop once on the 
 fore-part of the left foot, closing about three 
 inches, swinging the right foot out to the right, 
 the sole about four inches from the ground ; the 
 feet pointing in the same direction as they were 
 at the start. 
 
 Change. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 Exercise 25. 
 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 5, First Series, except 
 that the right foot is raised about four inches from the ground. 
 
 Caution. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 { 
 
 Cha/nge, 
 
 Retreating. 
 
 I Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of 
 the right, and hop once on the fore-part of the 
 right foot, retreating about three inches and 
 swinging the left foot to the front, the sole about 
 four inches from the ground ; the right foot 
 pointing to the right and the left pointing to the 
 front. 
 
 / Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left, bringing the left down in the place just 
 vacated by the right, and hop once on the fore- 
 part of the left foot, retreating about three 
 inches and swinging the right foot to the rear, 
 the sole about four inches from the ground the 
 right foot pointing to the right and the left foot 
 
 .pointing to the front. 
 
 See Exercise 1. 
 
 I 
 
 3' 
 
1* 
 
 i 
 
 i S Hi 
 
 I 
 
 f. 
 
 210 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 2, First Series, except 
 that the right foot is raised about four inches from the ground. 
 
 Caution. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change 
 
 -Advancing. 
 
 {Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of the 
 right and hop once on the fore-part of the right 
 foot, advancing about three inches and swinging 
 the left foot to the rear, the sole about four 
 inches from the ground ; the left foot pointing 
 to the left and the right pointing to the front. 
 
 / Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left, bringing the left down in the place just 
 vacated by the right, and hop once on the fore- 
 part of the left foot, advancing about three 
 inches and swinging the right foot to the front, 
 the sole about four inches from the ground ; 
 the left foot pointing to the left and the right 
 
 \ pointing to the front. 
 
 See Exercise 
 
 < 
 
 { 
 
 1, 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 This exercise is the same as Exercise 24. 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 This exercise is the same as Exercise 23. 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 " Second Position," as in Exercise 2, First Series, except 
 that the left foot is raised about four inches from the ground. 
 
 Caution. — Retreating. 
 
CALISTHENICS. 
 
 211 
 
 s, except 
 e ground. 
 
 irt of the 
 the right 
 swinging 
 30ut four 
 pointing 
 } front. 
 
 re-part of 
 place just 
 
 the fore- 
 tut three 
 he front, 
 
 ground ; 
 the right 
 
 (Spring from the right foot to the fore-part of 
 the left, and hop once on the fore-part of the left 
 foot, retreating about three inches and swinging 
 the right foot to the front, the sole about four 
 inches from the ground ; the left foot pointing 
 to the left and the right pointing to the front. 
 
 f Spring from the left foot to the fore-part of the 
 right, bringing the right down in the place just 
 vacated by the left, and hop once on the fore- 
 Two. J P**^ °^ *^® "Sht foot, retreating about three 
 inches and swinging the left foot to the rear, the 
 sole about four inches from the ground ; the left 
 foot pointing to the left and the right foot 
 
 I pointing to the front. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Attention. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 See First Series. 
 
 See First Series. 
 
 See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 
 See First Series. 
 
 The Class will turn to the right. 
 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 a 
 
 3, except 
 I ground. 
 
 -^-H 
 
 ^^^^-x 
 
212 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 n 
 
 I 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 -*f 
 
 LIGHT DUMB-BELL SERIES.* 
 
 Assemble. < See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 Position of " Attention." — The dumb-bells being held in the 
 hands. 
 
 Salute. < See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Attention. < See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 For Exercises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10. See Light 
 Dumb-bell Series, Part I. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 Position of *' Attention." 
 
 i Bring the right hand under the right shoulder, 
 thumb to the front, at the same time raising the 
 left arm from the shoulder to the left as high 
 as it will go, arm straight, thumb to the front ; 
 the body bending to the right. 
 / Bending the left elbow and wrist, bring the 
 I left hand under the shoulder, thumb to the 
 I front, at the same time straighten the right arm 
 "\ and raise it from the shoulder to the right, as 
 I high as it will go, arm straight, thumb to the 
 V^front, und the body bending to the left. 
 
 *See Note page 125. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 213 
 
 i in the 
 
 e Light 
 
 loulder, 
 3ing the 
 as high 
 B front ; 
 
 ing the 
 to the 
 ^ht arm 
 ight, as 
 I to the 
 
 Chanae i ^^ *^® word " Change," come to the position 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 For Exercise 1 2, See Light Dumb-bell Series. Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 13, See Exercise 14, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 14, See Exercise 18, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 15, See Exercise 19, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 16, See Exercise 20, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 17, See Exercise 21, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 18, See Exercise 22, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 PartL 
 
 For Exercise 19, See Exercise 26, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 PartL 
 
 For Exercise 20, See Exercise 27, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 21, See Exercise 28, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 22, See Exercise 29, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 23, See Exercise 30, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 24, See Exercise 31, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 25, See Exercise 44, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 26, See Exercise 45, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 PartL 
 
 For Exercise 27, See Exercise 46, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 *li 
 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 fc 
 
iMyi ! 
 
 
 214 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 11: 
 
 For Exercise 28, See Exercise 47, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 29. See Exercise 48, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 30, See Exercise 49, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 31, See Exercise 50, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 32, See Exercise 51, Light Dumb-bell Series. 
 Part I. 
 
 For Exercise 33, See Exercise 52, Light Dumb-bell Series, 
 
 Part I. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 mm m^ 
 
 Cut 39. 
 
 Position of " Attention," except that the arms are bent at 
 the elbows and wrists, and the dumb-bells underneath and 
 touching the arm-pits. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 216 
 
 sll Series. 
 
 )11 Series. 
 
 ;li Series. 
 )11 Series. 
 »11 Series. 
 b11 Series. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Change. 
 
 \ 
 
 / Straightening the elbows and wrists, swing 
 the dumb-bells outward and upward, until the 
 arms are in line with the shoulders, backs of the 
 hands up, then turn the arms, backs of the hands 
 down, bend the elbows, and bring the dumb-bells 
 over and touching the shoulders ; at the same 
 time rising and sinking on the fore-part o. the 
 
 \feet. 
 
 / Straightening the elbows and wrists, swing 
 the dumb-bells outwards until the arms are in 
 line with the shoulders, backs of the hands down, 
 then turn the arms, backs of the hands up, and 
 bending the elbows and wrists bring the dumb- 
 bells underneath and touching the armpits ; at 
 the same time rising and sinking on the fore- 
 
 \part of the feet. 
 
 ( On the word " Change," come to the position 
 
 I given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 I 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Caution. — Slow Time. 
 
 One. 
 
 e bent at 
 leath and 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three 
 
 Turn the hands and bring the dumb-bells 
 together in front and touching the clothes ; 
 backs of the hands in. 
 
 Keep the dumb-bells together, and the arms 
 straight, and raise them until they are above 
 and i front of the head ; backs of the hands to 
 the rear. 
 
 / Keep the dumb-bells together and turn them, 
 < backs of the hands up, and slightly bending the 
 ( elbows, allow the dumb-bells to touch the head. 
 
216 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Four. 
 
 
 Five. 
 
 Six. 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Nine. 
 
 Ten. 
 
 Eleven. 
 
 {Separate and extend the dumb-bells upwards, 
 forcing the arms obliquely back until they are 
 extended on a line with the shoulders, and as 
 they fall gradually from thence to the original 
 position of Attention, endeavour as much as 
 possible to elevate the chest. 
 
 Turn the backs of the hands to the rear and 
 I press back the dumb-bells with the arms extend- 
 *j ed, and raise them to the rear until they meet 
 ' above the head. 
 
 i 
 
 Keep the knees and arms straight, and bend 
 . over until the dumb-bells touch the ground in 
 ( front of the feet. 
 
 {Leave the dumb-bells on the ground, bring the 
 hands together thumbs locked, with the left 
 thumb in front ; slowly resume the erect position, 
 keeping the arms straight and raising them over 
 the head. 
 
 {Separate the arms forcing them obliquely back 
 until they are extended on a line with the 
 shoulders, and as they fall gradually from 
 thence to the original position of Attention, 
 endeavour as much as possible to elevate the 
 chest. 
 
 (Turn the backs of the hands to the rear and 
 press back the thumbs, with the arms extended 
 and raise them to the rear until they meet above 
 the head, the fingers pointing upward and the 
 thumbs locked with the left thumb in front. 
 
 Keep the knees and arms straight, and bend 
 over until the hands grasp the dumb-bells. 
 
 Keep the dumb-bolls together, backs of the 
 hands to the front, and bringing the body to 
 ^ the erect position, keep the arms straight and 
 V raise them over the head. 
 
oymnastics. 
 
 217 
 
 Twelve. 
 
 Change. 
 
 (Separate the dumb-bells forcing the arms 
 obliquely back until they are extended on a line 
 with the shoulders, and allow them to fall 
 gradually from thence to the original position of 
 Attention. 
 
 I ^ On the word '♦ Change," come to the position 
 ( given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 36. 
 
 Cut ^. 
 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Swing the left leg to the front around the 
 right until bending the left knee, the hollow of 
 the left rests against the right knee, and the 
 point of the foot rests on the ground in line 
 
218 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Ove. 
 
 Steady. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Steady. 
 Change. 
 
 I 
 
 with the hollow of the right foot ; at the same 
 time the left arm will be bent at the elbow and 
 the dumb-bell brought up to and plaoed against 
 the chest, the upper part touching the right 
 shoulder in front ; the right arm bent at the 
 elbow, and the dumb-bell brought up behind 
 and placed against the back. 
 
 Retain this position while you count eight. 
 
 Swing the left leg in a circle to the front 
 and around to the rear of the right, until, bend- 
 ing the left knee it rests against the hollow of 
 the right knee, and the point of the foot rests 
 on the ground in line with the ho'Sw of the 
 right foot ; at the same time straighten the left 
 arm and bring the dumb-bell down and by a 
 circular movement to the rear, bending the 
 elbow and bringing the dumb-bell up behind 
 and against the back ; also, straighten the 
 right arm and bring the dumb-bell down, and 
 by a circular movement to the front, bending 
 the elbow and bringing the dumb-bell up in 
 front and against the chest ; the upper part 
 touching the left shoulder in front. 
 
 Retain this position while you count eight. 
 
 On the word '• Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 The same as Exercise 36, only no pause is made between 
 " One" and "Two." 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 219 
 
 ie same 
 
 >ow and 
 
 against 
 
 he right 
 
 at the 
 
 behind 
 
 eight. 
 
 he front 
 lil, bend- 
 )lIow of 
 tot rests 
 r of the 
 . the left 
 nd by a 
 ing the 
 behind 
 ten the 
 yn, and 
 bending 
 1 up in 
 )er part 
 
 eight, 
 position 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 Position of " Attention." 
 
 Swing the right leg to the front around the 
 left until bending the right knee the hollow of 
 the right rests against the left knee, and the 
 point of the foot rests on the ground in line 
 with the hollow of the left foot ; at the same 
 One. i ^^^^ th© right arm will be bent at the elbow 
 and the dumb-bell brought up to, and placed 
 against the chest, the upper part touching the 
 left shoulder in front ; the left arm bent at the 
 elbow, and the dumb-bell brought up behind, 
 and placed against the back. 
 
 Steady. 
 
 Two. 
 
 between 
 
 Steady, 
 Change. 
 
 Retain this position while you count eight. 
 
 Swing the right leg in a circle to the front 
 and around to the rear of the left, until, bend- 
 ing the right knee, it rests against the hollow 
 of the left knee, and the point of the foot rests 
 on the ground in line with the hollow of the 
 left foot ; at the same time straighten the right 
 arm and bring the dumb-bell down and by a 
 circular movement to the rear, bending the 
 elbow and bringing the dumb-bell up behind, 
 and against the back ; also straighten the left 
 arm and bring the dumb-bell down, and by a 
 circular movement to the front, bending the 
 elbow and bringing the dumb-bell up in front 
 and against the chest ; the upper part touching 
 the right shoulder in front. 
 
 Ketain this position while you count eight. 
 
 On the word " Change," come to the position 
 given at the head of the next exercise, 
 
 a 
 
220 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 The same as Exercise 38, only no pause is made between 
 "One" and "Two." 
 
 Position of "Attention." 
 
 Salute. 
 
 I 
 
 Attention. \ 
 Class- 
 Front. 
 
 lass — I 
 ^\ont. \ 
 
 Salute. \ 
 
 - I 
 
 { 
 
 Right- 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 See First Series^ Calisthenics. 
 The class will turn to the right. 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 INDIAN CLUB SERIES OP 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The illimitable number of combinations that may be effected 
 in Artistic Indian Club swinging, the exceeding grace and 
 beauty of the movements, the poetry and rythm of motion, 
 especially when accompanied by music, the operation of the 
 mental faculties in conjunction with the physical, the splendid 
 exercise it gives to the body, especially the upper portion, the 
 fact of both sides being equally employed, the erect ease and 
 freedom of carriage acquired through its practice, mark it as 
 being pre-eminently adapted as an exercise for ladies. 
 
 In the family circle, reading aloud and cheerful conversation 
 furnish pure pleasure ; but how agreeably is this pleasure 
 varied by the air on the piano, the duet, or the song. By 
 
between 
 
 effected 
 race and 
 
 motion, 
 n of the 
 
 splendid 
 jion, the 
 ease and 
 ,rk it as 
 
 i^ersation 
 pleasure 
 ng. By 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 221 
 
 the introduction of Artistic Indian Club solos and duets 
 another beautiful and agreeable Cuddition to the happiness of 
 the family circle will be made. 
 
 Artistic Indian Club swinging consists of Positions, Circles 
 and Ellipses, which will be hereafter described. There are 
 also other movements, etc. 
 
 There are eight positions which are designated Right or 
 Left, (R.H. or L.H.) according as the club is in the right or 
 left hand. The circles are divided into Maxim and Minim 
 circles. The ellipses are divided into Upper and Lower ellipses. 
 Each Group in the Series, ought to be learned thoroughly 
 before proceeding to the next. 
 
 Each Exercise in a Group should be repeated 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 
 9, 1 2 or 1 6 times before changing to the next. 
 
 All the pupils will keep perfect time with the leader, and on 
 the word " Change," the club will glide to the next position, 
 care being taken to avoid jerking. 
 
 The heels must be kept together, as nothing looks more 
 awkward and ungainly than to have them apart. 
 
 Keep the body as much as possible from swaying, and on no 
 account allow it to bend to the rear or front, or twist. 
 
 The pupils should be encouraged to make other combina- 
 tions besides those given in the book. 
 
 At an entertainment Indian club swinging should always be 
 accompanied by music. 
 
 POSITIONS. 
 
 " First Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that an Indian club is held in 
 the right hand, the club hanging down ; the back of the hand 
 to the right, fourth finger on the knob of the club. (See Cut 4^). 
 
 "First Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 
 11^ 
 
Ill 
 
 si'- 
 
 I; 
 
 222 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 position of Attention, except that an Indian club is held in 
 the left hand, the club hanging down ; the back of the hand 
 to the left, fourth finger on the knob of the club; 
 
 " Second Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right elbow, being only 
 slightly bent, the arm is elevated to the right of and in line 
 with the face, the clu*^ perpendicular, handle down. {See 
 Cut 41). 
 
 " Second Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left elbow, being only 
 slightly bent, the arm is elevated to the left of and in line 
 with the face, the club perpendicular, handle down. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right fore-arm is raised 
 to the front and close to the upper-arm ; the elbow close to 
 the side and the club perpendicular, handle down. {See Gut 
 #). 
 
 "Third Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left fore-arm is raised 
 to the front and close to the upper-arm ; the elbow close to 
 the side and the club perpendicular, handle down. 
 
 " Fourth Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right arm is straight 
 and in line with the shoulders ; the club horizontal and 
 pointing to the right. (See Cut 48). 
 
 " Fourth Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left arm is straight and 
 in line with the shoulders ; the club hoiizontal and pointing to 
 the left. 
 
 " Fifth Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right arm is straight to 
 the front as high as the shoulder ; the club horizontal and 
 pointing to the front. {See Gut 44) • 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 223 
 
 held in 
 le hand 
 
 ) as the 
 ng only 
 J in line 
 n. {See 
 
 3 as the 
 ing only 
 I la line 
 
 e as the 
 is raised 
 r close to 
 {See Cut 
 
 e as the 
 is raised 
 close to 
 
 ke as the 
 straight 
 ntal and 
 
 ae as the 
 light and 
 )inting to 
 
 le as the 
 iraight to 
 >ntal and 
 
 " Fifth Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left arm is straight to 
 the front as high as the shoulder ; the club horizontal and 
 pointing to the front. 
 
 " Sixth Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right arm is bent at the 
 elbow and in front of the lower part of the face, the hand and 
 club being above the left shoulder ; the club perpendicular, 
 handle down. (See Cut JfS). 
 
 "Sixth Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left arm is bent at the 
 elbow and in front of the lower part of the face, the hand and 
 club being above the right shoulder ; the club perpendicular, 
 handle down. 
 
 " Seventh Position," R.H. — This position is t'>e same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right arm is be»t at the 
 elbow, the hand and club being under the left shoulder ; the 
 club perpendicular, handle up, the left arm horizontal and 
 pointing to the front. {See Cut 4G). 
 
 " Seventh Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left arm is bent at the 
 elbow, the hand and club being under the right shoulder ; the 
 club perpendicular, handle up, the left arm horizontal and 
 pointing to the front. 
 
 *' Eighth Position," R.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the right arm is slightly 
 bent at the elbow and in front of the body in a diagonal 
 direction to the left, the hand as liigh as the face ; the club 
 horizontal. • {See Cut 47'). 
 
 " Eighth Position," L.H. — This position is the same as the 
 position of Attention, except that the left arm is slightly 
 bent at the elbow and in front of the body in a diagonal 
 direction to the right, the hand as high as the face ; the club 
 horizontal. 
 
224 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 I 
 
 GROUP I. 
 
 , See Modes of Formation 'Part 1. 
 " First Position," R.H. 
 Salute. I See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Caution, — The Maxim Qircles and Upper Ellipses from the 
 Second Position. 
 
 Cut 41. 
 
 Exercise 1. — E.ff. 
 «' Second Position," R.H. 
 
 r Bring the club towards the right, down and 
 to the left, keeping the arm straight until it is 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 225 
 
 One. 
 
 A 
 
 from the 
 
 / 
 
 down and 
 intil it is 
 
 in front, when it is slightly bent at the elbow, 
 and the club and arm continuing the circle is 
 carried on to the left, up and to the right, the 
 arm gradually straightening as it passes the 
 body until the circle is complete and the arm 
 and club are at the place they started from. 
 
 L {See i, i, Cut 4I). 
 
 I On the word " Change,'! given as the club is 
 completing the circle, bring the right arm in 
 front to the left, the elbow being only slightly 
 bent and the club perpendicular, the handle 
 Change. < sliding through the hand about two or three 
 inches ; instantaneously raise the left hand and 
 grasp the handle below the right, and drop the 
 right arm to the side, coming to the position 
 
 \given at the head of the next exercise. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 / Bring the club towards the left, down and to 
 the right, keeping the arm straight until it is 
 in front, when it is slightly bent at the elbow, 
 and the club and arm continuing the circle is 
 carried on to the right, up and to the left, the 
 arm gradually straightening as it passes the 
 body until the circle is complete and the arm 
 and club are at the place they started from. 
 
 / On the word " Change," given as the club is 
 completing the circle, bring t^ie left arm in front 
 to the right, the elbow being only slightly bent 
 and the club perpendicular, the handle sliding 
 through the hand about two or three inches ; 
 instantaneously raise the right hand and grasp 
 the handle below the left, and drop the left arm 
 a \ to the- side, coming to the Second Position, R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. < 
 
 "■" 
 
l\ 
 
 226 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ■R.H. 
 
 (« 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 (( 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 Second Position," R.H. 
 
 Bring the club and arm — the elbow commenc- 
 ing to bend slightly — towards the left, down, 
 and the elbow straightening, to the right, up 
 and to the left, until the arm and club are at 
 the place they started from. (See 1, 1, Cut 4^)' 
 
 < See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the club and arm — the elbow commenc- 
 ing to bend slightly — towards the right, down, 
 and the elbow straightening, to the left, up and 
 to the right, until the arm and club are at the 
 place they started from. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 -R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 (( 
 
 Exercise 3.- 
 Second Position," R.H. 
 
 Turning the back of the right hand to the 
 
 front and keeping the arm straight, bring the 
 
 club and arm to the front, down, and passing 
 
 \ the right side, to the rear, up and over to the 
 
 I front as far as the place they started from. 
 
 \{See 2, 2, Cut 41.) 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.H. 
 Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Turning the back of the left hand to the 
 front and keeping the arm straight, bring the 
 club and arm to the front, down, and passing 
 the left side, to the rear, up and over to the 
 front as far as the place they started from. 
 
 ChoMge. 
 
 On£. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 227 
 
 commenc- 
 eft, down, 
 I right, up 
 lub are at 
 
 r. Cut 41). 
 
 commenc- 
 ;ht, down, 
 ft, up and 
 are at the 
 
 md to the 
 bring the 
 nd passing 
 )ver to the 
 rted from. 
 
 md to the 
 , bring the 
 tnd passing 
 3ver to the 
 from. 
 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 One. 
 
 Uxercise 4. — R.H. 
 Second Position," R.H. 
 
 Turning the back of the right hand to the 
 
 left and keeping the arm straight, bring the 
 
 club and arm to the rear, down, and passing 
 
 the right side to the front, up, and to the place 
 
 ^they started from. {See 2, 2, Cut 41). 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Turning the back of the left hand to the 
 right and keeping the arm straight, bring the 
 club and arm to the rear, down, and passing 
 the left side to the front, up, and to the place 
 they started from. 
 
 Change, \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 5. — R.H. 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 ' Bring the club and arm to the front in a 
 diagonal direction to the right, down, past the 
 left side to the rear in a diagonal direction to 
 
 / the left, up, and to the place they started from ; 
 
 ^' ^ the elbow commences to bend as the club and 
 
 arm pass to the left of the left side, and then 
 
 straightens as it is carried up and completes 
 
 \^the circle. (See 3, 3, Cut 4I). 
 
 See Exercise 1, R.H, 
 
228 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 L.H. 
 
 (( 
 
 One. \ 
 
 « 
 
 <t 
 
 Exercise 5.- 
 Second Position," JL-H. 
 
 / Bring the club and arm to the front in a 
 diagonal direction jto the left, down, past the 
 right side to the rear in a diagonal direction to 
 the right, up, and to the place they started 
 from ; the elbow commences to bend as the 
 club and arm pass to the right of the right 
 side, and then straightens as it is carried up 
 
 V and completes the circle. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 6. — B.H. 
 Second Position," R.H. 
 
 f Bring the club and arm to the rear in a 
 diagonal direction to the left, down, past the 
 left side to the front in a diagonal direction to 
 the right, and up to the place they started 
 \ from ; the elbow will commence to bend as the 
 I club and arm go down and pass the left 
 I shoulder, and commence to straighten after 
 ythey have passed. {See 3, 3, Cut 4^1). 
 
 Change. ^ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the club and arm to the rear in a 
 diagonal direction to the right, down, past the 
 right side to the front in a diagonal direction 
 to the left, and up to the place they started 
 from j the elbow will commence to bend as the 
 club and arm go down and pass the right 
 shoulder, and commence to straighten after they 
 
 V have passed, 
 
 One. 
 
 f 
 
 One. 
 
 < 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 229 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 7. — R.H, 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 r Bring the club and arm to the front in a 
 I diagonal direction to the left, down, past the 
 
 One. J ^^^^^ ^^^® *° *^® '®^^ ^^ a diagonal direction to 
 I the right, up, and to the place they started 
 I from ; the arm kept as straight as possible. 
 \{See 4, 4, Cut 41). 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 7. — L.ff. 
 ** Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the club and arm to the front in a 
 
 diagonal direction to the right, down, past the 
 
 left side to the rear in a diagonal direction to 
 
 the left, up, and to the place they started from ; 
 
 ^the arm kept as straight as possible. 
 
 ■j See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change, 
 
 Exercise 8. — H.ff, 
 " Second position,^ R. H. ' 
 
 {Bring the club and arm to the rear in a 
 diagonal direction to the right, down, past the 
 right side to the front in a diagonal dirsction 
 to the left, up, and to the place they started 
 from; the arm kept as straight as possible 
 {See 4, 4, Cut 41). 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
230 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ti 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 t 
 
 Exercise 8. — L.H. 
 
 « Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the club and arm to the rear in a 
 diagonal direction to the left, down, past the 
 left side to the front in a diagonal direction to 
 the right, up, and to the place they started 
 ivoTQ. ; the arm kept as straight as possible. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Caution. — The Upper Ellipses from the Second Position, 
 
 Exercise 9. — R.H. 
 
 " Second Position," R. H. 
 
 Bring the right arm to the rear until the 
 upper-arm is in line with the shoulders and the 
 fore-arm perpendicular, turn the back of the 
 hand to the right, letting the club incline to 
 the right and describe an ellipse ; the back of 
 the hand turning down and to the rear as the 
 club goes to the right and down ; the hand 
 coming towards and up behind the right side of 
 the back of the head as the club is carried to 
 the left and up, the ellipse being completed by 
 bringing the club and arm to the position given 
 . at the head of the exercise. {See 5, 5, Gut ^1). 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 Exercise 9. — L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 •* Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the left arm to the rear until the 
 upper-arm is in line with the shoulders and the 
 fore-arm perpendicular, turn the back of the 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 231 
 
 3ar in a 
 past the 
 ection to 
 r started 
 ible. 
 
 tion. 
 
 until the 
 3 and the 
 ;k of the 
 incline to 
 le back of 
 ear as the 
 the hand 
 ht side of 
 carried to 
 ipleted by 
 iion given 
 Cut 4-1). 
 
 until the 
 •s and the 
 ck of the 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. \ 
 
 hand to the left, letting the club incline to the 
 left and describe an ellipse ; the back of the 
 hand turning down and to the rear as the club 
 goes to the left and down ; the hand coming 
 towards and up behind the left side of the back 
 of the head as the club is carried to the right 
 and up, the ellipse being completed by bringing 
 the club and arm to the position given at the 
 head of the exercise. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 Exercise 10. — R.H. 
 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 Bring the right arm to the rear until the 
 upper-arm is in line with the shoulders and the 
 fore-arm perpendicular, the club inclining slight- 
 ly to the left, and bringing the hand to the left 
 and down behind the right side of the back of 
 the head, let the club describe an ellipse ; the 
 One. \ back of the hand turning down as the club 
 passes to the left and down behind the left 
 shoulder ; the back of the hand turning up, to 
 the right, and to the rear as the club comes to 
 the right and up behind the right shoulder and 
 arm to the position given at the head of the 
 exercise. {See 5, 5, Cut 41)' 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 10. — L.H. 
 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 Bring the left arm to the rear until the 
 upper-arm is in line with the shoulders and the 
 fore-arm perpendicular, the club inclining 
 
 I 
 
 isa 
 
m 
 
 .1 
 
 
 I-' 
 
 1 '. 
 
 II 
 
 282 PHYSICAL CULTTJRK. 
 
 slightly to the right, and bringing the l\|ind to 
 the right and down behind the left side of the 
 back of the head, let the club describe an 
 One. ) ellipse ; the back of the hand turning down as 
 the club passes to the right and down behind 
 the right shoulder ; the back of the hand 
 turning up, to the left, and to the rear as the 
 club comes to the left and up behind the left 
 shoulder and arm to the position given at the 
 heau of the exercise. 
 
 "First Position," L.H. — Drop the arm to the First Position, 
 L.H. 
 
 As before. 
 
 I 
 
 < See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 
 < As before. 
 
 Ri^ht— ( g^g g ^ g ^^^ jj^jjj 
 Turn. I ' ^ 
 
 Dismias. I See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Class — 
 J^ront. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 GROUP II. 
 
 Assemble. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 < See Modes of Formation, Part 1. 
 
 iition," R.H. 
 
 < See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
^e hf^nd to 
 }ide of the 
 escribe an 
 ig down as 
 wn behind 
 the hand 
 :ear as the 
 ad the left 
 ven at the 
 
 ; Position, 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 288 
 
 Ca.ntion.— -The Maxim Circles from the Third Pottition. 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.H, 
 "Third Position," RH. 
 
 \ 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 f Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 I Position, R.H. {See dotted lines, Cut 42.) 
 
 \ The same as One, Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 f Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 \ R.H. {See Cut 42). 
 
234 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 '': i: 
 
 Change. < 
 
 f On the word **Change," which will be given as 
 the club is completing the circle, bring the right 
 arm in front, to the left and down, the handle 
 of the club sliding through the hand for about 
 two or three inches, the club perpendicular, 
 handle down ; instantaneously raice the left 
 arm from the elbow and grasp the handle near 
 the knob with the left hand and drop the right 
 arm to the side, coming to the Third Position 
 
 Vl.h. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 J Raise the left arm and club to the Second Posi- 
 
 1 tion, L.H. 
 
 J The same as "One," in Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
 { Drop the arm and club to the Third Position. 
 
 \ L.H. 
 
 / On the word "Change," which will be given as 
 the club is completing the circle, bring the left 
 arm in front, to the right and down, the handle 
 of the club sliding through the hand about two 
 or three inches, the club perpendicular, handle 
 down ; instantaneously raise the right arm from 
 the elbow and grasp the handle near the knob 
 with the right hand and drop the left arm to 
 
 \the side, coming to the Third Position, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — H.H. 
 
 " Third Position," KH. ^ 
 
 j Raise the right arm and club to the Sect .d 
 1 Position, R.H. (See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 I The same as " One," in Exercise 2, R.H. 
 I Group I. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Change. 
 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 235 
 
 Three i Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 ( R.H. {See Cut J^). 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 
 "Third Position." L.H, 
 
 Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 Position L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three 
 
 { 
 
 ( Group I. 
 
 The same as "One," in Exercise 2, L.H. 
 
 •oup I. 
 
 Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 i JJi 
 \ L.H. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 3. — R.H. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 J Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 ( Position, R.H. {See dotted lines, Cut 42). 
 
 The same as "One," in Exercise 3, R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two 
 Three 
 
 ( The se 
 
 ( Group I. 
 
 / Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 R.H. {See Cut 4^). 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.H. 
 
 " "hird Position," L.H. 
 
 ( Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Three 
 
 \ Position, L.H. 
 
 j The same as "One," in Exercise 3, L.H. 
 
 j Group I. 
 
 Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 i L.H. 
 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, L,H. 
 
m 
 
 236 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 4. — E.H. 
 "Third Position/' R.H. 
 
 liaise the right arm and club to the Second 
 Position, a.H. (See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 I 
 
 ( The same as "One," in Exercise 4, R.H. 
 
 ) Group I. 
 
 Three i Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 I R.H. {See Cut J^\ 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.H. 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 { Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 t Position, L.H. 
 
 { The same as "One," in Exercise 4, L.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 r Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 1 L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Chcmge. < 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 5. — R.H. 
 " Third Position." R.H. 
 
 ( Raise the rijht arm and club to the Second 
 ( Position, R.H. {See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 ( The same as "One," in Exercise 5, R.H. 
 ( Group L 
 
 Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 Two. 
 
 ^^^^' I R.H. {See Cut 4^). 
 Change. < 3ee Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.ff. 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 {Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 Position, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 i 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 237 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 j The same as " One," in Exercise 6, L.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 \ L.H. 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H^. 
 
 (I 
 
 Exercise 6. — B.H. 
 
 Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 ( Position, R. H. (See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 
 The same as "One," in Exercise 6, R.H. 
 
 Gne. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 \ Group I. 
 
 ( Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 \ R.H. {See Cut 4^). 
 
 Change. | See Exercise J, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 I Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 \ Position, L.H. 
 
 i The same as " One," in Exercise 6, L.H. 
 I Group I. 
 ^, J Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 . [ Dr. 
 '• I L.H. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 7. — B.H. 
 " Third Position," R.H. 
 
 J Raisi. the right arm and club to the Second 
 I Position, R.H. {See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 «, I The same as ** One," in Exercise 7, R.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
1' 
 
 ' ! 'i 
 
 il 
 
 238 
 Three. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 j Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 i 
 
 {See Cut 42). 
 Change. ^. See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 7. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. . 
 
 Raise the left arm and cluh to the Second 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Change. 
 
 \ Position, L.H. (See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 The S8 
 Group I. 
 
 I The same as "One," in Exercise 7, L.H. 
 
 J Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 ^ L.H. {See Cut 4^). 
 
 I See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 8. — R.H. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 \ Position, R. H. {See dotted lines, Cut 4^)- 
 y^^ ( The same as "One," in Exercise 8, R.H. 
 
 ' Group I. 
 Three. [ Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 ^ R.H. {See Cut 42). 
 Change, ^j See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 8. — L.H. 
 ♦•Third Position," L.H. 
 
 I Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 ( Position, L.H. 
 
 { The same as "One," in Exercise 8, L. H. 
 I Group I. 
 Three, [ Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 ^ L.H. 
 Change, j See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 239 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Exercise 9. — R.H. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. " • 
 
 I Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 
 ) Position, RH. {See dotted lines, Cut 4^). 
 
 ( The same as "One," in Exercise 9, R.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
 i Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 ^ R.H. {See Cut 42). 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 9. — L.U. 
 Third Position," L.H. 
 
 ( Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 
 ( Position, L.H. 
 
 j The same as "One," in Exercise 9, L.H. 
 
 ( Group I. 
 
 ( Drop the &rm and club to the Third Position, 
 
 ^ L.H. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 10. — R.H. 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( Raise the right arm and club to the Second 
 ^^^' I Position, R.H. {See dotted lines, Cut 42). 
 _, J The same as "One," in Exercise 10, R.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 Three i ^^^V *^® ^^"^ ^^^ ^^"^ *° *'^® Third Position. 
 
 ^ R.H. {See Cut 4^)- 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 10. — L.H. 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 ( Raise the left arm and club to the Second 
 ^^'- \ Position, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 
 Three. 
 
 Change. 
 
240 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 i'iil 
 
 ■ii y 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 .( The same as " One," in Exercise 10, L.H. 
 I Group I. 
 g ( Drop the arm and club to the Third Position, 
 ^ L.H. 
 " First Position," L.H —See Group I. 
 
 Two. 
 Three. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 { 
 
 As before. 
 
 ^*~ I See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 Front. \ 
 
 As before. 
 
 Salute. \ 
 
 Dismiss. \ See Modes of Formation, Part 1. 
 
 GROUP ni. 
 
 Assemble. I See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 "First Position," R.H. 
 
 Salute. \ See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Caution. — Combined Afaxirh Circles and Upper Ellipses, and 
 combined Maxim Circles from the Second Position. 
 
 Exercise 1. — B.ff. 
 *' Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. < The same as in Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 J, f The same as " One," in Exercise 9, R.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 ^41 
 
 Exercise 1. — L,H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 One, I The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 
 Two. [ ^^® ®*^'^® *^ ''One," in Exercise 9, L.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. — R.H. 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 1, RH. Group I. 
 
 Two. i ^^^ ^*™® *^ " ^^®»" in Exercise 10, E.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Chari^e. / gee Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 
 Two. { '^^^ ^*"® ^^ "One," in Exercise 10, L.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Change. / See Exercise 1, L.H. Group I, 
 
 Exercise 3. — R.H. 
 "Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 2, R.H. Group T. 
 
 Two, { ^^® ^^™® *^ * '^^^" i^ Exercise 9, R.H. 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Change. / See Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H, 
 
 One, i The same as in Exercise 2, L.H. Group I. 
 
 
w 
 
 242 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 ^ ( The same as "One," in Exercise 9, L.H. 
 
 ^"">- { Group I. 
 
 Vhange. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 4. — R.H. 
 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 0,1^, f The same as in Exercise 2, R.H. Group I. 
 
 _ I The same as " One," in Exercise 10, R.H. 
 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 One. i The same as in Exercise 2, L.H. Group I. 
 
 _ ( The same as "One," in Exercise 10, L.H. 
 
 Two. i ^ T 
 
 ( Group L 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 
 Eocercise 6. — R.H. 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 One, 
 
 Two. 
 
 J The same as in Exercise 3, R.H. Group I. 
 
 ( The same as "One," in Exercise 5, R.HI 
 ( Group I. 
 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.H. 
 " Second Position." LH. 
 
 One. J The same as in Exercise 3, L.H. Group I. 
 
 ^ ( The same as "One," in Exercise 5, L.H. 
 
 \ Group L 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, L.H. Group ^. 
 
OYMNASTICS. 
 
 243 
 
 Exercise 6. — R.H, 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. J The same as in Exercise 4, R.H. Group I. 
 
 r The same as "One," in Exercise 6, R.H. 
 
 Two. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
 Change. i See Exercise 1, R.H. Group I. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 " Second Position." L.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 4, L.H. Group I. 
 m j The same as "One," in Exercise 6, L.H. 
 
 I Group I. 
 
 " First Position," L.H.-Soe Group I. 
 
 Salute 
 
 ■ I 
 
 As before. 
 
 Front { ®®® ^°^® ^* Formation, Part I. 
 
 ■ \ 
 
 Salute, 
 
 As before. 
 
 ^^u^ { See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Dismiss. I See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 GROUP IV. 
 Assemble, i See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 "First Position," R.H. 
 
 Salute, i See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Ca.ution.~Combined Upper Ellipses, Combined Maoeim 
 Circles, and Combined Maxim Circles and Upper Ellipses from 
 the Third Position. 
 
 

 II 
 
 ! 
 
 Ill 
 
 ^ J 
 
 
 244 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. — if./T. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 J The same as '«Oae," "Two" and "Three," 
 ^'**' \ Exercise 9, R.H. Group II. 
 ^^^ ( The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 I Exercise 10, R.H. Group II. 
 Change. ^ gee Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.H. 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 ^ ( The same as "One," "Two and "Three," 
 
 "*• t Exercise 9, L.H. Group II. 
 
 I The same as " One," " Two " and " Three," 
 \ Exercise 10, L.H. Group IL 
 
 Change, \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 2. — B.H. 
 " Third Position," E.K. 
 
 j The same as " One," " Two " and "Three," 
 ( Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 I The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 ^'^^' 1 Exercise 2, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," LH. 
 
 ( The same as " One," " Two " and " Three," 
 { Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as " One," " Two " and " Three," 
 
 One. 
 
 Two 
 
 \ Exercise 2, L.H. Group II. 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group IL 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 245 
 
 Exercise Z.~R.ff. 
 " Third Position," R.H. 
 
 One. \ ^*^^ ^*°™e as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 I Exercise 3, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Two / ^^^ ^^"^^ *^ " ^^^'" *' Two " and " Three," 
 ( Exercise 4, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, RH. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.B. 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 One i ^^® ^*™® *^ "One," "Two" and *' Three," 
 I Exercise 3, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Two i ^**® ^*^® ^ "^''^'" "T^°" *n^ "Three," 
 ( Exercise 4, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Fx'-ycise 4. — R.JS. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 \ Exercise 5, R.H. Group II. 
 
 f The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 ( Exercise 6, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.H. 
 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 [ The same as " One," " Two " and " Three," 
 I Exercise 5, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Two [ '^^®^*°^® ^ "^^^'" "Two" and "Three," 
 I Exercise 6, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
WW 
 
 ^5?J 
 
 246 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 5. — B.ff, 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 j The same as "One," "Two" and 
 
 ( Exercise 7, R.H. Group II. 
 
 ( The same as " One," " Two " and 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Cfiange. 
 
 " Three," 
 " Three," 
 
 { 
 
 Exercise 8, R.H. Group II. 
 See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 j The same as " One," " Two " and 
 j Exercise 7, L.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as "One," "Two" and 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 \ Exercise 8, L.H. Group II.' 
 
 I See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 " Three," 
 " Three," 
 
 / Exercise 6. — R.H. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 j The same as " One," " Two " ivnd 
 I Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as " One," " Two" and 
 
 One. 
 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 \ Exercise 9, R.H. Group II. 
 
 < See Exercise 1, R.H, Group II. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 
 " Three," 
 " Three," 
 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 j The same as " One," " Two " and 
 ( Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 j The same as " One " " Two " and 
 ^^' ( Exercise 9, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 " Three," 
 " Three," 
 
 ill 
 
GYMNASTK^S. 
 
 247 
 
 Exercise 7. — R.H. 
 
 " Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( The same as " One," " Two" and 
 ( Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as " One," " Two " and 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 Change. 
 
 \ Exercise 10, R.H. Group II. 
 
 \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 7. — LM. 
 
 " Three," 
 "Three," 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 ( The same as " One," " Two " and 
 ( Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as " One," " Two " and 
 
 One. 
 Two. 
 
 \ Exercise 10, L.H. Group II. 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 8. — R.H. 
 
 " Three," 
 " Three," 
 
 " Third Position," R.H. 
 
 ( The same as " One," " Two " and 
 \ Exercise 2, R.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as " One," " Two" and 
 
 One. 
 Ttvo. 
 Cha/nge. 
 
 \ Exercise 9, R.H. Group II. 
 
 ■| See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 8. — L.H. 
 
 " Three," 
 ** Three," 
 
 "Third Position," L.H. 
 
 j The same as " One," " Two" and 
 ^"®- \ Exercise 2, L.H. Group II. 
 
 I The same as "One," "Two" and 
 ^^°' \ Exercise 9, L.H. Group II. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group II. 
 
 " Three," 
 Three," 
 
 (( 
 
248 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 9. — R.ff. 
 
 "Third Position," R.H. 
 
 f The same as " One," " Two " and " Three," 
 ^^^' I Exercise 2, R.H. Group IJ. 
 
 Two. 
 
 I The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 ) Exercise 10, R.H Group II. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, R.H. Group II. 
 
 Exercise 9. — L.H. 
 
 " Third Position," L.H. 
 
 j The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 I Exercise 2, L.H. Group II. 
 
 The same as "One," "Two" and "Three," 
 Exercise 10, L.H. Group II. 
 
 " First Position," L.H.— See Group I. . 
 
 Two. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 { 
 
 I 
 
 As before. 
 
 See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 
 As before. 
 
 ^Jf^i— \ See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Turn 
 Dismiss 
 
 \ 
 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 GROUP V. 
 
 Assemble. < See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 "First Position," R.H. 
 Salute. < See First Seriep, Calisthenics. 
 
GYMNASTICS. %i^ 
 
 Caution. — The Minim Circles from the Fourth Position. 
 
 Cut p. 
 
 Exercise 1. — B.H. 
 
 " Fourth Position " R.H. 
 
 / Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 and let the club describe a circle ; going down, 
 towards the left, up, passing in the rear of and 
 nearly touching the arm, and to the right until 
 in the position it started from ; the fingers will 
 loosen their grasp considerably as the club 
 commences the circle, the hold being maintained 
 principally by the thumb and upper part of the 
 fore-finger, and resume their hold as the club 
 \^comes up to the position. {See 1, 1, Gut 43.) 
 
 One. J 
 
250 
 
 PHYSICAL CULtURE. 
 
 Change. < 
 
 ' On the word " Change " given as the club is 
 completing the circle, bring it and the arm 
 down, to the left, and as the right hand comes 
 near the left, seize the club with the left hand 
 above the right, immediately letting go with 
 the right and carrying the club up to the 
 position given at the head of the next exercise; 
 
 V the right arm will drop to the side. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.If. 
 
 " Fourth Position " L.H. 
 
 One. < 
 
 Change. < 
 
 / Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 let the club describe a circle; going down, 
 towards the right, up, passing in rear of and 
 nearly touching the arm, and to the left until 
 in the position it started from ; the fingers will 
 loosen their grasp considerably as the club 
 commences the circle, the hold being maintained 
 principally by the thumb and upper part of the 
 fore-tinger, and resume their hold as the club 
 
 \ comes up to the position. 
 
 On the word " Change," given as the club is 
 completing the circle bring it and the arm 
 down, to the right, and as the left hand comes 
 near the right, seize the club with the right 
 hand above the left, immediately letting go 
 with the left and carrying the club up to the 
 position given at the head of the next exercise ; 
 ^the left arm will drop to the side. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 251 
 
 Exercise 2. — R.H. 
 " Fourth Position " R.H. 
 
 Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 and let the club describe a circle ; going up, 
 towards the left, down, passing in rear of and 
 i nearly touching the arm, towards the right, and 
 up until in the position it started from ; {See 
 i, i, Gut 4^3) ; the fingers, etc, see Exercise 1, 
 \^R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exe -^e 2.—L.H. 
 " Fourth Position " L.H. 
 
 {Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 let the club describe a circle ; going up, towards 
 the right, down, passing in rear of and nearly 
 touching the arm, towards the left, and up 
 until in the position it started from ; the 
 fingers, etc., see Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Change. 
 
 j See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Eocercise 3.- 
 Fourth Position" R.H. 
 
 -R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 
 Cha/nge. 
 
 f Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 I and let the club describe a circle ; going down, 
 I towards the left, up, passing in front of and 
 J close to the arm, to the right, and down until ii 
 the position it started from ; {See ^, 2, Cut ^3) 
 the knob of the club will be held in the hand, 
 and it will turn between the first and second 
 \^fingers and th mb as the club describes the circle. 
 
 See Exercise 1, R.H, 
 
252 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 I 
 
 i' 
 
 1 I 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.H. 
 "Fourth Position" L.H. 
 
 / Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 let the club describe a circle ; going down, 
 toward the right, up, passing in front of and 
 close to the arm, to the left, and down until in 
 the position it started from ; the knob of the 
 club will be held in the hand, and it will turn 
 between the first and second fingers and thumb 
 as the club describes the circle. 
 
 One. 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 Change. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 Exercise 4. — R.H. 
 
 " Fourth Position" R.H. 
 
 Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 
 and let the club describe a circle ; going up, 
 
 towards the left, down, passing in front of and 
 
 \ close to the arm, towards the right, and up, 
 
 I until in the position it started from ; {See 2, 2^ 
 
 \Cut 4-S) ; the knob etc., see Exercise 3, R.H. 
 
 { 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 See Exercise 1, E.H. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.E. 
 
 " Fourth Position " L.H. 
 
 {Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 let the club describe a circle ; going up, towards 
 the right, down, passing in front of and close to 
 the arm, towards the left, and up, until in the 
 position it started from ; the knob, etc., see 
 Exercise 3, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H, 
 
ble and 
 : down, 
 of and 
 until in 
 » of the 
 ill turn 
 I thumb 
 
 possible 
 oing up, 
 ; of and 
 and up. 
 
 See 2, 2, 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 Exercise 5. — R.H. 
 
 253 
 
 " Fourth Position " R.H. 
 
 r Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 I and let the club describe a circle ; passing 
 I towards the rear, to the left, to the front nearly 
 ^"^" \ touching as it passes over the arm, and to the 
 I right, until in the position given at the head of 
 Vthe exercise. {See 3, 3, Cut 43). 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, K.H. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.H. 
 
 " Fourth Position " L.H. 
 
 f Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 
 I let the club describe a circle ; passing towards 
 J the rear, to the right, to the front nearly touch- 
 \ ing as it passes ovQr the arm, and to the left, 
 
 I until in the position given at the head of the 
 
 Vexercise. 
 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 sible and 
 , towards 
 i close to 
 :il in the 
 etc., see 
 
 Exercise 6. — R.H. 
 
 " Fourth Position " R.H. 
 
 (Keep the right arm as straight as possible 
 and let the club describe a circle ; passing 
 towards the front, to the left, to the rear nearly 
 touching as it passes over the arm, and to the 
 right, until in the position given at the head of 
 the exercise. (See 3, 3, Cut ^3). 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
¥ 
 
 u I 
 
 254 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 i 'I 
 
 l 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 " Fourth Position " L.H. 
 
 {Keep the left arm as straight as possible and 
 let the club describe a circle ; passing towards 
 the front, to the right, to the rear nearly touch- 
 ing as it passes over the arm, and to the left, 
 until in the position given at the head of the 
 exercise. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 The Positions and descriptions given for Exercises 6 and 6 
 will do for Exercises 7 and 8, the only difference being that 
 the club passes under instead of over the arm. {See 4, -4, Cut 43). 
 and the back of the hand is up, the knob of the club being 
 held between the first three fingers and thumb ; the thumb to 
 the front, the third finger to the rear and the first and second 
 fingers to the right (or left). 
 
 " First Position," L. FI.— See Group I. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Bight — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 { 
 
 As before. 
 
 See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 
 As before. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I, 
 
 GROUP VI. 
 Assemble. < See Modes of Formation, Part I, 
 " First Position " R.H. ^ 
 
 Salute. < See First Series, Calisthenics, 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 255 
 
 Caution. — The Minim Circles from the Fifth Position. 
 
 Cut 44- 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.H. 
 "Fifth Position" R.H. 
 
 / Keep the arm as straight as possible and 
 
 I let the club describe a circle outside of the arm, 
 
 I going down, towards the rear, up, passing close 
 
 I to the arm, and to the front until in the position 
 
 given at the head of the exercise ; {See 2, 1, Cut 
 
 44) ; the fingers, etc., see Exercise 1, R.H. Group 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 One. 
 
 
 I 
 
256 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.H. 
 " Fifth Position " L.H. • 
 
 { The description given in Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 I will do for this exercise. 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. Gro«p V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — Ji.H. 
 " Fifth Position " R. H. 
 
 / Keep the arm as straight as possible and lat 
 the club describe a circle outside of the arm, 
 going up, towards the rear, down, passing 
 One. •( close to tho arm, to the front, jind up to the 
 position given at the head of exercise ; (^See 
 1, 1, Cut JfJi) ; the fingers, etc., see Exercise 1, 
 \ R.H. Group V. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 " Fifth Position " L.H. 
 
 ^ J The description given in Exercise 2, R.H. 
 
 1 will do for this exercise. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 3. — B.H. 
 "Fifth Position" RH. 
 
 / Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle inside of the arm, 
 going down, towards the rear, up, passing close 
 One. < to the arm, and to the front until in the position 
 given at the head of the exercise ; {See 2, 2, Out 
 44) '} the knob, etc., see Exercise 3, RH. Group 
 V. 
 
 V 
 
 Change. 
 
 ;.2iil 
 
 ■! See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 257 
 
 1, R.H. 
 
 and Idt 
 ;he arm, 
 
 passing 
 ) to the 
 se ; (^See 
 ercise 1, 
 
 I, R.H. 
 
 and let 
 le arm, 
 ig close 
 position 
 , 2, Cut 
 . Crroup 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.II. 
 "Fifth Position" L.H. 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 I The description given in Exercise 3, R.H. 
 I will do for this exercise. 
 
 I See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 4, — R, H. 
 " Fifth Position " R. H. 
 
 Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle inside of the arm, 
 going up, towards the rear, down, passing close 
 to the arm, to the front, and up to the position 
 given at the head of the exercise ; {See 2, 2, Cut 
 J^J^)', the knob, etc., see Exercise 3, RH. Group V. 
 
 I See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Otm. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Exercise 4. — L.H, 
 
 "Fifth Position" L.H. 
 
 One. [ '^'^'^ description given in Exercise 4, R. H. 
 I will do for this exercise. 
 
 Change. | gee Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 5. — R.H. 
 " Fifth Position," R.H. 
 
 (Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, passing towards the 
 right, to the rear, to the left, nearly touching as 
 it passes over the arm, and to the front, until 
 in the position given at the head of the exercisf . 
 {See 3, 3, Gut U-) 
 
 \ See Exercise 1. R.H. Group V. 
 
 9 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
258 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTUBE. 
 
 Exercine 5. — L.H. 
 
 "Fifth Position." L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, passing towards the 
 left, to the rear, to the right, nearly touching as 
 it passes over the arm, and to the front until in 
 the position given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 i See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 6. — R.H. 
 
 " Fifth Position," RH. 
 
 Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, passing towards the 
 left, to the rear, to the right, nearly touching as 
 it passes over the arm, and to the front until in 
 the position given at the head of the exercise. 
 ^(See 3, 3, Cut U-) 
 
 i See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.ff. 
 
 "Fifth Position," L.H. 
 
 (Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle passing towards the 
 right, to the rear, to the left, nearly touching as 
 it passes over the arm, and to the front, until 
 in the position given at the head of the exercise. 
 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V, 
 
GYMNASTICS, 
 
 259 
 
 The positions and descriptions given for Exercises 5 and 6 
 
 rhcfhf ""'"";■""'*• "■" -'y -difference being that 
 ae olub ..11 pass under instead of over the arn,, (.ee i\ Cut 
 
 fnst tZTb ; «"' """^ '"«^" """ "■»■"" '• "•« thumb 
 
 rn;:r;t:r:her„t'"«^^ --"'^^ ^-^ *-« <=- -^ — <> 
 
 "First Position," L.H.-See Group I. 
 Salute I As before. 
 
 I See Mode of Formation. Part I. 
 As before. 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 j See Modes of Formation. Part I. 
 
 GROUP VII. 
 
 Assemble 
 
 ' j See Modes of Formation. Part I. 
 " First Position." R.H. 
 
 Salute. I See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
260 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 fl 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 Caution, — 57ie Minim Circle and combined Minim and 
 Maxim Circle^ from the Sixth Poaition. 
 
 Cut 46. 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.U* 
 "Sixth Position," R.H. 
 
 {Let the club describe a circle towards the left, 
 down, to the right, up behind the back and 
 shoulders, and to the left until in the position 
 given at the head of the exercise j the club will 
 be held by the knob. {See Cut J^5.) 
 
 i See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V, 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 *Thi8 exercise is difficult to execute and may be left out, J^xercise 2 being 
 repeated a greater number of times instead. 
 
GVMNASTICS. 
 
 261 
 
 One. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.H.* 
 " Sixth Position," L.H. 
 
 (Let the club describe a circle towards the 
 right, down, to the left, up behind the back and 
 shoulders, and to the right until in the position 
 given at the head of the exercise ; the club will 
 be held by the knob, 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2.~R.H. 
 '♦Sixth Position." R.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Two. I The same as "One," Exercise 2, R.H. Group L 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 " Sixth Position," L.H. 
 
 One, \ The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Two. I The same as "One," Exercise 2, L.H. Group L 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 " First Position," L.H.— See Group L 
 As before. 
 
 See Mode of Formation. Part L 
 
 Salute. \ 
 Front. 
 
 Class — J 
 
 Salute 
 
 ■ I 
 
 As before. 
 
 Dismiss, i See Modes of Formation. Part I. 
 
 *Th8 exercise is difficult to execute and may be left out. Exercise 2 
 being repeated a greater number of times instead. 
 
262 
 
 physioal culture. 
 
 ^fiffljl 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 -r .i 
 
 il 
 
 GROUP VIII. 
 Assemble. | See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 " First Position." R.H 
 Salute. i See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Caution.— r/te Minim Circle, and comhined Minim and 
 Maxim Circle from the Seventh Position. 
 
 Cut Mi. 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.H. 
 " Seventh Position," R.H. 
 
 (Let the club describe a circle behind the 
 back and sboalders, towards the right, up, to 
 the left, down and to the right until in the 
 position given at the head of the exercise j the 
 club will be held by the knob. {See Cut 46). 
 
 One. 
 
K^ 
 
 GYMNASl-JS. 
 
 263 
 
 
 On the word " Change," given as the club is 
 
 completing the circle, bring it and the right hand 
 
 Change. ■{ towards the left hand, seize the handle with the 
 
 left hand above the right and come to the 
 
 Seventh Position, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 1, — L.H. ' 
 " Seventh Position." L.H. 
 
 Let the club descibe a circle behind the back 
 and shoulders, towiirds the left, up, to the right, 
 down, and to the lefc until in the position given 
 at the head of the exercise ; the club will be 
 held by th* knob, 
 
 (On' the word "Change," given as the club is 
 completing the circle, bring it and the left hand 
 towards the ri^nt hand, seize the handle with 
 the right hand above the left and come to the 
 Seventh Pcsitioi R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 One. 
 Two- 
 
 Change. 
 
 1 
 { 
 I 
 
 Exercise 2.— R.H. 
 "Seventh Position." R.H. 
 
 The same as in Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 The same as "One," Exercise 2, R..H. Group L 
 
 See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 "Seventh Position." L.H. 
 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Two. \ The game as "One," Exercise 2, L.IL Group \. 
 
 " First Position." — See Group I. 
 Salute. < As before. 
 
 Cki88— I g^^ ^^^^ ^^ Formation, Part I. 
 Front. \ ' 
 
26i 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Eight — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 As before. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
 GROUP IX. 
 
 Assemble. | See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 " First Position," R.H. 
 Salute. j See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 Caution. — The Minim Circles from the Eighth Position. 
 
 Cut 47. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 265 
 
 (. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 m. 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.H. 
 " Eighth Position." RH. 
 
 Let the club describe a circle outside of the 
 arm, going down, towards the right, up, pass- 
 ing close to the arm, to the left, and down urtil 
 in the position given at the head of the exercise ; 
 the club will be held by the knob. (See 1 1 
 .Cut 47.) ' ' 
 
 On the word " Change,'' given as the club is 
 
 completing the circle, bring it and the right 
 
 hand towards the left hand, seize the handle with 
 
 the left hand above the right, and come to the 
 
 .Eighth Position, L.H. 
 
 Exercise 1, — L.H. 
 ♦'Eighth Position." L.H. 
 
 Let the club describe a circle outside of the 
 
 arm, goL-g down towards the left, up, passing 
 
 close to the arm, to the right, and down until 
 
 in the position given at the head of the exercise ; 
 
 ,the club will be held by the knob. 
 
 (On the word " Change," given as the club is 
 completing the circle, bring it and the left hand 
 towards the right hand, seize the handle with 
 the right hand above the left, and come to the 
 Eighth Position, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — R.H. 
 "Eighth Position." R.H. 
 
 {Let the club describe a circle outside of the 
 arm, going up, towards the left, down, passing 
 close to the arm, to the left, and up until in the 
 position given at the head of the exercise ; the 
 club will be held by the kuob. {See 1, 1, Cut 4?). 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
266 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Clicmge. < See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 "Eighth Position." L.H. 
 
 Let the club describe a circle outside of the 
 
 arm, going up, towards the right, down, pass- 
 
 One. -l ing close to the arm, to the right, and up until 
 
 in the position given at the head of the exercise ; 
 
 ^the club will be held by the knob. 
 
 Change. < See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 The positions and descriptions given for Exercise 1 and 2, 
 will do for Exercises 3 and 4 ; the only difference being that 
 the club will pass inside instead of outside of the arm. {See 2, 
 2, Cut 47). 
 
 Exercise 5. — E.H. 
 
 " Eighth Position." R.H. 
 
 {Let the club describe a circle, passing to the 
 front, to the right, to the rear, nearly touching 
 as it passes over the arm, a^d to the left until in 
 the position given at the head of the exercise ; 
 the club will be held by the knob. {S?.e S, 3, 
 Cut Jfl.) 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, TI.H. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.H. 
 "Eighth Position." L.H. 
 
 (Let the club describe a circle, passing to the 
 front, to the left, to the rear, nearly touching 
 as it passes cvf * the arm, and to tha right until 
 in th3 position given at the head of the ejiercise ; 
 the club will be held by the knob. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 % 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 le of the 
 wn, pass- 
 up until 
 exercise ; 
 
 1 and 2, 
 jing that 
 . {See 2, 
 
 g to the 
 touching 
 b until in 
 jxercise ; 
 ( J^e 3, 3, 
 
 267 
 
 Exercise 6. — RII. 
 " Eighth Position." R.H. 
 
 (Let the club describe a circle, passing to the 
 rear, to the right, nearly touching as it passes 
 over the arm, to the front, and v,o the left until 
 in the position given at the head of the exercise ; 
 the club will be held by the knob. (See 3 3 
 CtU47.) ' ' 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 
 " Eighth Position." L.H. 
 
 Let the club describe a circle passing to the 
 
 I rear, to the left, nearly touching as it passes 
 
 over the arm, to t.e front, and to the right until 
 
 in the position given at the head of theer.ercise ; 
 
 ^the club will be held by the knob. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 The positions and descriptions given for Exercises 5 and 6 
 will do for Exercises 7 and 8 ; the only diflfei.nce being that 
 the club will pass under instead of over the arm. (See A A 
 Cut 47.) \ ^^^y 
 
 t 
 
 " First Position," R.H.— See Group I. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change 
 
 Sah 
 
 g to the 
 
 Class — 
 
 touching 
 
 Front. 
 
 jht until 
 
 Salute. 
 
 BJiercise; 
 
 Right 
 
 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 i 
 
 { 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 { 
 
 As before. 
 
 See Mode of Formation, Part I. 
 
 As before. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 
268 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 GROUP X. 
 
 Assemble. < See Modes of Formation, Part I. 
 " First Position," R.H. 
 Salute. I See First Series, Calisthenics. 
 
 Caution. — The Minim Circles, and combined Minim circles 
 and Upper Ellipses, from the Second Position. 
 
 Exercise 1. — R.H. 
 
 " Second Position." R.H. 
 
 / Keep the arm as straight as possible, and let 
 the club describe a circle, towards the right, 
 down, to the left, pacing in front of and close to 
 ^ f the arm, up, and to the right until in the position 
 
 given at the head of the exercise ; the club will 
 be held by the knob, which will turn in the 
 hand as the club describes the circle. {See 6, 6^ 
 \Cut 41.) 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 . Exercise 1.- 
 
 " Second Position." L.H. 
 
 -L.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, towards the left, down, 
 to the right, passing in front of and close to the 
 arm, up, and to the left until in the position 
 given at the head of the exercise ; the club etc., 
 .See Exercise 1, R.H. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 -'.■.-; i-.l.>i*P(;*'H">i'' ' ^.Ci^^S^i^iil''■ 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 269 
 
 m circles 
 
 , and let 
 le right, 
 I close to 
 position 
 ilub will 
 in the 
 See 6, 6, 
 
 and let 
 , down^ 
 s to the 
 )osition 
 ub etc., 
 
 Exercise 2. — R.H. 
 Second Position," R.H. 
 
 Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, towards the left, 
 One. 7 '^°'^"' *° *^« "ght» passing in front of and 
 close to the arm, up, and to the left until in the 
 position given at the head of the exercise {see 6, 6, 
 _Cut 41); the club etc., see Exercise 1, R.H. ' 
 Chanffe. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L.H. 
 
 fKeep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, towards the right 
 down, to the left, passing in front of and cfose 
 to the arm, up, and to the right until in the 
 position given at the head of the exercise ; the 
 club etc., see Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 C/iange. J See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 3. — H.ff. 
 " Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. j The same same as in Exorcise 1, R.H. 
 
 Two. I The same as " One," Exercise 9, R.H. Group L 
 
 Chanffe. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.ff. 
 'Second Position," LIL 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. 
 
 Two. I ^'^^ «^°^« ^ ''One," Exercise 9, L.H. 
 I Group I. 
 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 ii. :] 
 
'■l 
 
 270 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 4. — R.U, 
 "Second Position," R.H. 
 
 One. I The same as in Exercise 2, R.Ii. 
 
 Two. ^ ^^® ^^™^ ^^ "One," Exercise 10, R.H. 
 \ Group I. 
 
 Change. | gee Exercise 1, E.H. Group V. 
 
 Bxercue 4. — L.H. 
 " Second Position," L. H. 
 
 One. I Tha same as in Exercise 2, L.H. 
 
 Two. i ^^^ ^^"^® ^^ "One," Exercise 10, L.H. 
 I Group I. 
 
 " First Position," L.H.— See Gioup L 
 Salute. \ As before. 
 
 Front. \ ^^^ ^°^** ^^ Formation. Part I. 
 Salute. I As before. 
 
 TurnT \ ^^^ ^' *' ^^^^^ I^rill. 
 Dismiss, i See Modes of Formation. Part T. 
 
 GROUP XI. 
 
 Assemble. | See Modes of Formation. Part I. 
 "First Position," R.H. 
 Salute. I See First Series, Oalisthenica. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 271 
 
 Oaution.-rA. Minim Circles, Lower Ellipses, combined 
 Mmim arcles and Lower Mlipses, and combined Maxim 
 Circles and Lower Ellipses from the First Position. 
 
 ), R. PI. 
 
 L.H. 
 
 Cut 48, 
 
 Exercise 1. — H.ff, 
 *' First Position," I^.H. 
 
 fKeep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, going towards the 
 left, up, to the right passing in front of and 
 close to the arm, and down to the position it 
 started from ; the club can be held by the knob. 
 {See 1,1, Cut 48.) 
 
 Change, I See Exercise i, R.H. Group V 
 
272 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 1. — L.FI. 
 " First Position," L.H. 
 
 Keep the arm as straiglit as possible and let 
 
 the club describe a circle, going towards the 
 
 One. -l right, up, to the left, passing in front of and 
 
 close to the arm, and down to the position it 
 
 started from ; the club can be held by the knob. 
 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — R,H. 
 " First Position," R. H. 
 
 {Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 the club describe a circle, ^oing towards the 
 right, up, to the left, passing in front of and 
 close to the arm, and down to the position it 
 started from ; the club can be held by the knob. 
 {See 1, i, Cut 48.) 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 i 
 
 See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 2. — L.H. 
 
 " First Position," L.H. 
 
 / Keep the arm as straight as possible and let 
 
 the club describe a circle, going towards the 
 
 One. left, up, to the right, passing in front of and 
 
 (close to the arm, and down to the position it 
 started from ; the club can be held by the knob. 
 See Exercise 1, L. H. Group V. 
 
 Caution. — The Lower Ellipses from the First Position. 
 

 GYMNASTICS, 
 
 273 
 
 le and let 
 .^ards the 
 it of and 
 osition it 
 the knob. 
 
 e and let 
 ('^ards the 
 it of and 
 osition it 
 the knob. 
 
 e and let 
 ivards the 
 it of and 
 losition it 
 the knob. 
 
 on. 
 
 it 
 
 Exercise 3. — RH, 
 First Position," R. H. 
 
 if Bringthe club and right arm to the rear of 
 the right side, (back of the hand to the right 
 the club held by tlie knob, thumb to the front 
 the first finger to the right and pointing down' 
 and the second finger to the rear of and under 
 
 - the knob,) and describe an ellipse ; the club and 
 hand going behind the back towards the left up 
 to the right, the club passing the arm in rear of 
 It, and the arm and club going down, and to the 
 left until at the place they started from. (See 2 
 
 I 2, Cut 48.) ^ 
 
 One. 
 
 Change. 
 
 j See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 3. — L.ff. 
 
 ** First Position,"!. H. 
 
 Bring the club and left arm to the rear of the 
 left side, (back of the hand to the left, the club 
 held by the knob, thumb to the front, the first 
 finger to the left and pointing down, and the 
 
 One. ^ '^T^ ^""^^"^ *° ^^^ re*'" of and under the knob.) 
 and describe an ellipse ; the club and hand 
 going behind the back towards the right, up, to 
 the left, the club passing the arm in rear of' it 
 and the arm and club going down, and to the 
 right until at the place they started from. 
 
 Change, i See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 10 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 .// 
 
 £?. 
 
 Ja 
 
 
 
 ■iS 
 
 Q.. 
 
 o 
 
 i/x 
 
 fA 
 
 i.O 
 
 I.I 
 
 WilM IIIII2.5 
 
 IIM IIIII2.2 
 
 % 1^ II 
 
 2.0 
 
 .8 
 
 
 1.25 II 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 6" — 
 
 
 ► 
 
 v] 
 
 <? 
 
 /a 
 
 'e). 
 
 % 
 
 
 A 
 
 /^ 
 
 0/^ 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 V 
 
 ^^ 
 
 .)!% 
 
 4? 
 
 o 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 -b" 
 
 ■^ 
 
 '% 
 
 ri7 
 
% J? 
 
 s 
 
 (:P. 
 
274 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 Exercise 4. — R.H. 
 
 " First Position," R.H. 
 
 The club being held by the knob, in rear of 
 the right side, (thumb to the left, the first 
 finger to the front and the second finger to the 
 right of and underneath the knob) describe an 
 ellipse ; the club and arm going towards the 
 One. -I right and up, the club continuing to go up, to 
 the left behind the right arm, the arm coming to 
 the left behind the back, as the club goes to the 
 left ; the club and arm then go down and to the 
 right until in the position they started from. 
 (See 2, 2, Cut 4B). 
 
 Cliange. 
 
 See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 << 
 
 Exercise 4, — L.H. 
 
 " First Position," L.H. 
 
 The club being held by the knob, in rear of 
 the left side, (thumb to the right, the first 
 finger to the front, and the second finger to the 
 left of and underneath the knob) describe an 
 ellipse ; the club and arm going towards the left 
 One. \ and up, the club continuing to go up, to the 
 right behind the left arm, the arm coming to the 
 right behind the back as the club goes to the 
 right; the club and arm then go down and 
 to the left until in the position they started 
 from. 
 
 Change. | See Exerciije 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
GYMNASTICS. 
 
 275 
 
 Exercise 5. — R.H. 
 
 " First Position," R.H. 
 
 Qne. [ The same as in Exercise 1, il.H. 
 
 Two. 
 
 f The same as " One," Exercise 3, E.H. 
 
 ) 
 
 Cliange. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 5. — L.H. , 
 
 First Position," L.H. 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 1, L.H. 
 Two. I The same as " One," Exercise 3, L.H. 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 6. — R.ff, 
 ' First Position," R.H. 
 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 2, R.H. 
 Two. I The same as " One," Exercise 4, R.H. 
 Change. I See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 6. — L.H. 
 " First Position," L.H. 
 
 One. [ The same as in Exercise 2, L.H. 
 Two. \ The same as " One," Exercise 4, L.H. 
 
 Chanqe. 
 
 See Exercise 1, L H. Group V. 
 
276 
 
 PHYSICAL CULTURE. 
 
 
 Exercise 't.—R.H. 
 " First Poaition," R.H. 
 
 One. 
 
 { 
 
 The same as in Exercise 3, R.H. 
 Two. [ The same as " One," Exercise 1 , R. H. Group I. 
 Clmnge. \ See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 7. — L.H. 
 « First Position," L.H. 
 
 Owe. \ The same as in Exercise 3, L.H. 
 Two. I The same as " One," Exercise 1, L.H. Group I. 
 Chavge. \ See Exercise 1, L.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 8. — B.H. 
 "First Position," R.H. 
 
 One. \ The same as in Exercise 4, R.H. 
 Two. \ The same as " One," Exercise 2, R.H. Group I. 
 Change. | See Exercise 1, R.H. Group V. 
 
 Exercise 8. — L.H. 
 " First Position," L.H. 
 
 One. [ The same as in Exercise 4, L.H. 
 Two. I The same as "One," Exercise 2, L.H, Group I. 
 Change. \ See Exercise 1, L.H Group V. 
 
Salute. 
 
 Class — 
 Front. 
 
 Salute. 
 
 Right — 
 Turn. 
 
 Dismiss. 
 
 GYMNASTICS. 
 
 As before. 
 
 See Mode of Formation. 
 
 As before. 
 
 See S. 4, Squad Drill. 
 
 See Modes of Formation. 
 
 277